JP6699714B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, it performs a lottery with the winning of the game ball to the starting opening, the change production and directing those of or in accordance with the lottery result, pachinko machine to be displayed on the liquid crystal screen is known. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. ..

In such a pachinko machine, etc. , a gaming machine has been proposed in which a continuous notice display is provided over a plurality of fluctuations to notify in advance that a specific effect such as reach fluctuation effect will be performed in the future fluctuation effect. There is.

JP, 2010-279560, A

In this type of pachinko machine and the like , there has been a demand for a gaming machine with a further interest in the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem like, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine that can the interest in the game in countercurrent above.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention has an acquisition means for acquiring first information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, and a determination information storage in which the first information acquired by the acquisition means is stored. And a determination means for determining the first information stored in the determination information storage means, and based on the first information stored in the determination information storage means before being determined by the determination means. 1 shows a pre-judgment unit capable of executing pre-judgment, a pre-information storage unit that stores pre-information indicating a pre-judgment result by the pre-judgment unit every time the acquisition condition is satisfied, and a judgment result by the judgment unit Display means for displaying identification information for display, display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and a plurality of dynamic display modes of the determination game for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means A dynamic display mode storage unit that stores the dynamic display mode, and a dynamic display mode determination unit that determines one dynamic display mode from the dynamic display mode storage unit based on the determination result. And a specific display number determining means capable of determining the number of times of displaying the specific display mode on the display means based on the prior information stored in the prior information storage means, and the specific display. to display whether or not the determined mode has a specific determination means for executing, based on the prior information, the specific display number determination unit includes: the determination result of the specific to the pre-information storage unit When it is determined that the specific display mode is to be displayed by the specific determination means in a state where the prior information corresponding to the preliminary determination indicating that the determination is made is not stored, the preliminary information storage means The dynamic display mode of the identification information that is dynamically displayed at the final time is the number of times the specific display mode is displayed on the display unit less than the number of times the acquisition condition corresponding to the stored advance information is satisfied. The specific display mode is configured to be determinable so as to be a dynamic display mode, and the specific display mode is configured such that, when the specific display frequency is determined by the specific display frequency determination means, the specific display mode is stored in the determination information storage means. The identification information is displayed once in each of the display areas where the identification information has been displayed across two continuous dynamic display modes displayed corresponding to the information, and the specific display mode is displayed. In the period, the special identification information corresponding to the identification information can be displayed in a display mode different from the identification information in a size smaller than the identification information in an area where the specific display mode is not displayed. What is Is.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, an acquisition unit that acquires the first information based on the satisfaction of the acquisition condition, a determination information storage unit that stores the first information acquired by the acquisition unit, and the determination thereof. Judgment means for judging the first information stored in the information storage means, and performing prior judgment based on the first information stored in the judgment information storage means before being judged by the judgment means. Advance determination means capable of storing the preliminary information indicating the preliminary determination result obtained by the preliminary determination means each time the acquisition condition is satisfied, and the identification information indicating the determination result obtained by the determination means. Display means to be displayed, display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and a plurality of dynamic display modes as dynamic display modes of the determination game for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means And a dynamic display mode storage unit that stores therein, and a dynamic display mode determination unit that determines one dynamic display mode from the dynamic display mode storage unit based on the determination result. A specific display number determination means capable of determining the number of times the display means displays the specific display mode based on the prior information stored in the pre-article information storage means, and whether the specific display mode is displayed. whether or not discrimination anda specific determination means for executing, based on the prior information, the specific display number determination means, that it is determined that the determination result of the specific to the pre-information storage unit If the specific determination means determines that the specific display mode is to be displayed in a state in which the prior information corresponding to the preliminary determination is not stored, the information stored in the preliminary information storage means. The dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed at the final time is the number of times the specific display mode is displayed on the display unit less than the number of times the acquisition condition corresponding to the previous information is satisfied. The specific display mode corresponds to each of the first information stored in the determination information storage unit when the number of times is determined by the specific display number determination unit. The identification information is displayed once in each of the display areas where the identification information was displayed over two continuous dynamic display modes to be displayed, and during the period in which the specific display mode is displayed, The special identification information corresponding to the identification information can be displayed in a display mode different from that of the identification information in a size smaller than the identification information in an area where the specific display mode is not displayed. ..

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type in the special symbol, and (b) is a second hit random number counter C4 and a hit in the normal symbol. It is the schematic diagram which showed the correspondence relationship typically, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the pre-reading production lottery table 1, and (d) is an example of the pre-reading production lottery table 2. It is the schematic diagram shown. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the prefetch frequency lottery table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the prefetch production selection table typically, (c) is a production content command selection table. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the notice data table 1, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the notice data table 2, and (c) is a notice It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the data table 3 typically. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of pre-reading notice 1 displayed on a 3rd symbol display device, (b) is a display mode of pre-reading notice 2 displayed on a 3rd symbol display device. It is a figure showing an example, and (c) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of pre-reading notice 3 displayed on the 3rd symbol display device. (A) is a timing chart showing the timing at which the pre-reading notice display mode is displayed when the pre-reading notice number is 4, and (b) shows the pre-reading notice display mode when the pre-reading notice number is 3. It is a timing chart which showed the timing displayed. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control control equipment. It is a flowchart showing a start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows a through gate passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the starting-up process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which shows the pre-reading production selection processing which is executed by the MPU inside the voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which shows the pre-reading production lottery processing which is executed by the MPU inside the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 6 is a flowchart showing a display prefetch command process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. 7 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the notice frequency selection table in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the SW scenario table in 2nd Embodiment. Is. (A) is a mimetic diagram showing typically an example of production selection table 1 in a 2nd embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of production selection table 2 in a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of special figure variation 1 which is an example of a variation pattern in the second embodiment, and (b) is a characteristic diagram which is an example of a variation pattern in the second embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically the content of figure variation 2, and (c) is a figure which showed typically the content of special figure variation 3 which is an example of the variation pattern in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the content of the special figure fluctuation 4 which is an example of the fluctuation pattern in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the special figure which is an example of the fluctuation pattern in 2nd Embodiment It is the figure which showed the content of the variation 5 typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the notice data table 1 in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the model which showed typically an example of the notice data table 2 in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure and (c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of notice data table 3 in a 2nd embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the advance notice data table 4 in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the notice production selection processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 2nd execution form. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the notice number selection table 2 in 3rd Embodiment, (b) showed typically an example of the SW scenario table 2 in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the production selection table 3 in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flow chart which showed the production lottery processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 3 performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the notice production selection process 2 performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect process 3 performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 4 performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the notice production selection process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the content of ROM of MPU of the main controller in 5th Embodiment, (b) is an example of the status selection table in 5th Embodiment It is the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 6, and (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the status information in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the small hitting exclusive variation pattern in 5th Embodiment, (b) is a small hitting exclusive variation pattern selection table (status B) in 5th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example typically, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the small hitting-only variation pattern selection table (status C) in 5th Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the small hitting-only fluctuation pattern selection table (status D) in 5th Embodiment, (b) is a small hitting-only fluctuation pattern selection in 5th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the table (status E) typically. It is a timing chart of a variation display when the number of transition variations is three in the fifth embodiment. (A1) and (a2) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of variation 1 when the number of transition variations is 3 in the fifth embodiment, and (b1) and (b2) are diagrams of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of variation 2 when the number of transitional changes in 3 is 3. In (c1-(A)) and (c1-(B)), It is a figure showing an example of a display mode of fluctuation 3 in the case of three times. (C2) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of variation 3 when the number of transition variations is 3 in the fifth embodiment, and includes (d1-(A)), (d1-(B)), and d2) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the variation 3 when the number of transition variations is 3 in the fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 5th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol fluctuation start processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the status transfer process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 5 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a timing chart of the variable display in the case without the alternative variable display in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a timing chart of the variable display in the case of the alternative variable display in the sixth embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the small hitting exclusive variation pattern table in 6th Embodiment, (b) is a small hitting exclusive variation pattern selection table (status B) in 6th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example, and (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the small hitting-only variation pattern selection table (status C) in 6th Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the small hitting exclusive variation pattern selection table (status D) in 6th Embodiment, (b) is a small hitting exclusive variation pattern selection in 6th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the table (status E) typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the production time setting table in 6th Embodiment, (b) showed typically an example of the maximum production frequency determination table in 6th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the alternative fluctuation pattern table in 6th Embodiment, (d) is an example of an alternative production lottery table in 6th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch lottery process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 6 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the winning command reception processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 6th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the pre-reading production lottery process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the status command reception processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 6th execution form. It is the flowchart which shows the production setting processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 6th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / production process 5 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the alternative production lottery process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is a sectional view of a variable winning a prize device in a 7th embodiment. It is a top view showing a part of interior of a variable winning a prize device in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol variation start processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric accessory opening/closing process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the modification of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in the modification of 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric accessory opening/closing process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in the modification of 7th Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinge 18 serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by the ball flowing down on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1 ), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with its front surface protruding and the upper surface opened, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to descend to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. Operated.

  The stage is a production mode in which various productions displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are made uniform, and in the pachinko machine 10, three stages of “a town stage”, an “empty stage”, and an “island stage”. There are two stages. Then, various effects such as a variation effect and a reach effect that are performed in association with the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting prize), which will be described later, are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been done. The change of the stage is performed when the player operates the frame button 22 during a period in which no change effect is performed or during high-speed change. Every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “town stage”→“empty stage” is changed. ”→“Island stage”→“City stage”→... Immediately after the power is turned on, the "town stage" is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, when the normal reach effect is started, when the normal reach effect is started, the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen for the effect mode of the super reach during normal reach. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect contents at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means perform a change control of the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided illumination portions 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED built therein. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and during the jackpot or reach effect, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress, or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. A display lamp 34, which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and is capable of displaying during payout of an award ball and when an error occurs, is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the illumination section 32 on the right side by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

  A ball rental operating unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount as a number as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a so-called cash machine, which is a pachinko machine in which a ball is directly lent to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to share a pachinko machine using a card unit with a cash machine.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a for pressing, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the change of the electric resistance. (Not shown) and are built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is set to ON and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount, and the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is rotated. The sphere is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes according to, and thereby the sphere is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball-pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, and The sphere spontaneously falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as “thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and has a large number of nails for guiding balls, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first prize. It is configured by assembling the ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80 and the like, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and wood screws are applied from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and inside the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and a shot ball is formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70. It is the area that flows down.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by forming an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn when a ball enters the first entrance 64, and a normal symbol (first when the ball passes through the second entrance 67). A lottery of 2 symbols) will be held. In the lottery of the special symbol performed for the entrance into the first entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the jackpot type Is also determined. When it becomes a big hit of the special symbol, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds or until 10 balls are won). ) It is opened and the opening is repeated 5 times (5 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, and thus a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. As the jackpot type of the special symbol, two types of "big hit A" and "big hit B" are provided, and after the special game state ends, as a value added after the end of the big hit, on the game according to these jackpot types. Value (game value) is given to the player.

  Further, when the special symbol (first symbol) is selected, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, The special symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entered balls is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the first symbol display. It is shown by the device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display ends in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, a lottery for the next special symbol is performed and a variable display corresponding to the lottery. Is started. The special winning opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Therefore, during the special game state, the player hits a ball to win the special winning opening 65a, so that a large number of balls also enter the first entrance 64. Therefore, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 is maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state.

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball in the second entrance 67, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol is hit. When the normal pattern hits, the electric accessory that accompanies the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. It becomes a state. That is, when the normal symbol hits, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64, and as a result, the special symbol is easily selected by lottery.

  Further, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is selected, the variable symbol of the normal symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) elapses, The ordinary symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the sphere passes through the second entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is the first symbol display device 37. While being displayed, the second symbol holding lamp 84 is also displayed. When the variable display is completed on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next ordinary symbol is selected by lottery and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Is started.

  As described above, two types of "big hit A" and "big hit B" are provided as big hit types of special symbols.

  Both "big hit A" and "big hit B" are in a special game state of 16 rounds (16R big hit), and after that, if "big hit A" is the added value after the end of big hit, it is next big hit Until then, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol). On the other hand, if it is "big hit B", from the end of the big hit, until the lottery is executed 100 times (until the fluctuation of the special symbol is started), the normal symbol is in the time saving state.

  Here, "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, a so-called probability state of the special symbol (during a change in the special symbol), in other words, a special game state (16R jackpot). ) Is the state of the game that is easy to move to. On the other hand, if it is not "high probability state of special symbol", it is called "low probability state of special symbol", this is a state where the jackpot probability is lower than the probability change state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbols). Further, the "time saving state of the normal symbol" (during the time saving of the regular symbol) is a state of the game in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. On the other hand, when it is not "time saving state of ordinary symbol", it is called "normal state of ordinary symbol", which means that the winning probability of ordinary symbol is normal, that is, the winning probability is lower than that during the time saving. ..

  As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot and the probability variation period of the special symbol are common regardless of the type of the jackpot, and "the time reduction of the ordinary symbol is determined depending on the type of the jackpot. The period of being in a "state" is changing. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be changed according to the type of jackpot, or only a part of the type of jackpot may be changed. Further, for example, instead of changing the period of "time saving state of the normal symbol" according to the type of jackpot, the time to open the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entrance 64 or once. It is also possible to change the number of times the electric accessory is released by hitting the ordinary pattern. Further, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot, "special symbol high probability state" and "normal symbol time saving state", but after "special symbol high probability state" ends, "normal symbol time saving state" It may be configured so that

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power source or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the "low probability state of special symbol". After that, when it becomes a jackpot of the special symbol, it shifts to the "high probability state of the special symbol" and shifts to the "time saving state of the ordinary symbol".

  On the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side of FIG. 2), a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, are provided with a first symbol. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display or a variation by indicating by a lighting state whether or not the lottery for the special symbol that is performed in association with the entry into the first entry slot 64 (starting winning) is in progress. As a stopped symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown in a lighting state, or fluctuation among the balls entered in the first entrance 64 is not executed. The number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls), is indicated by a lighting state.

  If the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of entry is suspended up to 4 times. , The number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reservations is not limited to four and is three or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b is for displaying the number of rounds in a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the light emission colors of the respective LEDs (for example, red, green, and blue) are different, and by the combination of the light emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs (high probability state of special symbols) Or, it is possible to display normal patterns such as reduced working hours. In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but when it is a big hit, it corresponds to the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B). A special design (first design) is shown.

  Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) is executed on the first symbol display device 37 by using it as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right. The columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main controller 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, while the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4(a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9". Each main symbol is formed by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol made of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are attached to the front of the wooden box with attached patterns simulating characters such as plane, furoshiki, and helmet. An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached design, and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached design.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is displayed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit A", a variable display in which the main symbols to which odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" are added are displayed is performed. Further, in the case of "big hit B", the variable display in which the main symbols to which the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are arranged is displayed. On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery result is out of alignment, a variable display in which the main symbols having the same number are not arranged is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 4(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, other than that. The upper third ⅓ is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, center, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed on the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of numbers, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from the top to the bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol column Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol column Z2 and the right symbol column Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle and lower three rows for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol column Z1, the right symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of the jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols in the present embodiment) is arranged on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is horizontally provided above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small region Ds1 is a region for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64, and the small region Ds2. And Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, which suggests to the player that the jackpot is in a state where it is easier to make a transition to the big hit than usual. In the small area Ds2 in the center, usually, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy with a hachimaki) performs a predetermined motion, sometimes performs a special motion different from the predetermined motion, or another character appears. A notice production is performed by putting it out.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the maximum number of times of entry is four. The number of balls to be reserved is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved sphere number pattern is displayed for each one reserved sphere number, and the number of reserved spheres is displayed according to the number of displayed reserve sphere number patterns. That is, when one reserved sphere number design is displayed in the small area Ds1, it is indicated that the number of reserved spheres is one sphere, and when four reserved sphere number designs are displayed, the number of reserved spheres is It shows that it is four balls. If the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, but the maximum number of reserved balls is three times. It may be set to the number below or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not the lottery of the normal symbol that is performed along with the ball passing through the second entrance 67 is being performed, As a stop symbol after the end of the variation, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is shown by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the sphere passes through the second ball entrance 67, the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped by a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol "○"), the electric accessory that accompanies the first entrance 64 operates for a predetermined time. The state is set (opened), and as a result, the ball is easily inserted into the first ball inlet 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second ball entrance 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol holding lamp 84 as well. It Four second design holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third design display device 81.

  The variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the passage of the ball in the second entrance 67 is not limited to the maximum number of reserved balls 4 times as in the case of the first entrance 64, and the number of times is 3 times or less, or 5 times or more. (For example, 8 times) may be set. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be lit.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first ball entrance switch. A lottery for special symbols is made by the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is also one of the prize holes through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally elongated rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 is a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed so that the big hit is stopped. While making it, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (16 rounds of big hits) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of award balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening/closing on the front side with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. It has and. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower side of the front face to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normally closed state. The state and the state operate alternately.

  The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning is performed. A special game state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins inside the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is being opened. It may be formed.

  Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering a certificate or an identification label are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate or the like affixed to the adhesive space K1 is provided on the front frame 14 It can be seen through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that have not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the outlet 66. On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93 as a unit. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

  The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

  Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), a box base and a box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to extend over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and when the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or when the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and to. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing sticker, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, the tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and the downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out the balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls is paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About look-ahead production>
In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball inlet 64 and the various counters have been acquired for the special design holding ball, various information (whether hit or not, stop type) , Fluctuation pattern) is determined (look-ahead) in advance. When the pre-reading is completed, a winning information command (a big hit winning command or a missed winning command) including various information (whether hit, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the winning information command, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether to execute the prefetching effect.

  Here, the prefetch effect will be described. The pre-reading effect is a notice effect that is executed across the variation of the special symbol (third symbol), as shown in FIGS. 13(a) and 13(b). As the content of the notice effect, as shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C, characters indicating the number of look-ahead effects are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. At that time, the background color of the character is selected and displayed by a lottery (either blue, yellow, or red).

  Specifically, a case where four times are selected in the prefetch effect shown in FIG. 13A will be described as an example. Pre-reading is executed for the reserved balls stored in the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and the pre-reading effect is given to the winning information command based on the pre-reading. When it is decided to execute the prefetching effect 4 times, the prefetching effect as shown in FIG. 13A is executed over the variation from the holding first area to the holding fourth area.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13A, in the prefetching effect in which the number of prefetching effects is 4, the variation 1 (the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved first area) and the variation 2 (the reserved second area) The "first time" character shown in FIG. 12(a) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the look-ahead effect of the notice 1 which is the first look-ahead effect. This notice display is displayed before the fluctuation of the special symbol (third symbol) in the fluctuation of fluctuation 1 (while it is fluctuating), and for a while even when the special symbol of fluctuation 2 starts to fluctuate. During this period (in the present embodiment, the notice display time is 3 seconds), it is displayed.

  Next, between the variation 2 and the variation 3 (variation of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved third area), the “second time” shown in FIG. 12B as the prefetching effect of the notice 2 which is the second prefetching effect. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This notice display is displayed before the variation of the special symbol of variation 2 (third symbol) stops (while it is varying) as in the first notice display, and the special symbol of variation 3 starts to vary. It is displayed for a while even at the timing (in this embodiment, the notice display time is 3 seconds).

  Then, between the variation 3 and the variation 4 (variation of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved fourth area), the “third time” shown in FIG. 12C as the prefetching effect of the notice 3 which is the third prefetching effect. The characters are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This notice display is displayed before the fluctuation of the special symbol of variation 3 (third symbol) is stopped (while it is varying) like the first and second notice displays, and the special symbol of variation 4 is displayed. Even when the timing to start the fluctuation starts, it is displayed for a while (in the present embodiment, the notice display time is 3 seconds). At the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, if the special symbol is hidden by the display of the notice effect, a small "○" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a substitute for the special symbol (third symbol). It is displayed and blinks, for example, green and white during the change, and when the special symbol is stopped, it is stopped and displayed in white indicating a detachment.

  In this way, in the pre-reading effect, the stop display of the special symbol is hidden by the notice and the next variable display is started until the final number of the pre-reading effect is reached, so that the player can select the special symbol by lottery. It can appear as if it were being continued. Therefore, it is possible to show the variation effect without clearly showing the variation of the deviation to the player, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player is disappointed by the deviation.

  In addition, the specific notice display mode (corresponding to notices 1 to 3) displayed in the prefetching effect is high-speed displayed before the symbol fixing period of one variation, as shown in the detailed diagram of FIG. When the state of the high-speed fluctuation period in which the symbols are variably displayed is switched to the state of the low-speed fluctuation period in which the symbols are displayed at low speed, or shortly before the switching, the display is started. Then, the period during which the symbol is fixedly stopped is also displayed, and the next fluctuation display is started, and is continuously displayed during the low speed fluctuation period of the fluctuation. Notice 2 and notice 3 have the same structure.

  This allows multiple variations to appear as if one variation is being displayed much faster. Therefore, a plurality of fluctuations can be made to appear as one fluctuation.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the third symbol is configured to be hidden in the specific notice display mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and during the period in which the specific notice display mode is displayed, one corner of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. For example, the design may be reduced to a small size, or the design may be configured to be variably displayed with a temporary design (for example, "○" or "x").

  Further, in the present embodiment, while the display of the specific notice display mode is configured to hide the display of the third symbol, it may be configured to delay the start time of the variable display of the third symbol. .. In this case, the variation display of the third symbol may be suddenly started at high speed. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load for displaying and controlling the third symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, although the details will be described later, since the last variation of the look-ahead effect is configured to be the out-reach super-reach or the jackpot reach, the notice effect of the look-ahead effect is displayed to the player. If you do so, you can increase your expectation for jackpots. Therefore, the player can play the game expecting that the prefetching effect will not be executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In addition, the pre-reading effect is displayed at a timing prior to the timing of the change symbol stop, so compared to the case where the pre-reading effect is performed at the start of the change, the player does not perform the pre-reading effect at the start of the change. It is possible to suppress the problem of disappointment at an early stage.

  In the present embodiment, even when the third symbol is hidden by displaying the notice effect, an alternative symbol (“○” in the present embodiment) is displayed, so the stop timing of the third symbol is replaced with that. It can be confirmed by the design. Here, since the alternative symbol is configured to be displayed smaller than the normal symbol, it is difficult to identify the alternative special symbol. Therefore, the player who wants to know the stop timing of the special symbol can be notified, and the player who wants to play the game according to the production of the game makes it difficult to understand the stop timing of the special symbol according to the design production. , It is possible to show an effect as if the change was performed once for all the number of pre-reading effects.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the change of the special symbol is configured to be hidden by the notice effect, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the special symbol is stopped at a chance such as “3” “4” “1”. You may. Further, the special symbol may be configured to be displayed as a different symbol (for example, a symbol of a girl character or characters such as chance) different from the normal time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the pre-reading effect, all advance notice effects are configured to straddle two fluctuations, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a lottery effect and a non-striking effect may be selected respectively. You may comprise. With such a configuration, various notice effects can be performed. Further, the notice effect may be changed according to the result of the final hit determination of the prefetch effect (for example, if the hit determination is a big hit, the notice effect that straddles the variation is likely to be selected). With such a configuration, it is possible to easily determine the win/fail judgment result from the form of the notice production.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of look-ahead effects is configured to be selected by lottery, but when the jackpot winning command is received, a greater number of look-ahead effects are configured to be selected. Good. With such a configuration, the notice effect is displayed more times, so that the player can have a greater expectation for a big hit.

<Electrical structure of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of main controller 110>
The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  In the main control device 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 6, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, lottery for special symbols, lottery for ordinary symbols, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37, setting of display on the second symbol display device 83, and setting of display on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform the above.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first per random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for the, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type out of the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used to set the initial value of the first random number counter C1. A counter CINI1 and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern are used. Moreover, the random number counter C4 per second is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the second per random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which each time it is updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 24). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance ball entrance. The values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the change type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball 64. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored at the timing of passing through one of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the special symbol big hit random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is special. When it matches the value of the random number that is a big hit set by the symbol big hit random number table, it is determined as a big hit of the special symbol. Also, this special symbol jackpot random number table is for low probability of special symbols (the period when the special symbol is in a low probability state), and when there is a high probability that the jackpot of special symbols will be higher than that low probability (special symbol) Of high random numbers) and the number of random numbers included in each of them is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed at a low probability of a special symbol and at a high probability of a special symbol. The special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for high probability of special symbols and the special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for low probability of special symbols are in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided in.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). After reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol hold of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

  Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit for the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is when the special symbol is removed.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit for the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of a special symbol big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first random number counter C1, at the time of low probability of the special symbol, there are three random number values that are big hits of the special symbol, and the random number value "7,107,282" is a special symbol for low probability. It is stored in the jackpot random number table. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 300, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 3, the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is “1/100”.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are 30 random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol, and the values are "4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299" is a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. It is stored in. In this way, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, while the total number of random number values is 300, the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 30, so the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is "1/10".

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, a random number value that is a big hit stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, and a random number value that is a jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. Then, the random numbers that are big jackpots are set so that the values do not overlap. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random number value for jackpot regardless of the status of the pachinko machine 10, there is a risk that the random number value will be input from the outside and the jackpot will be apt to be fraudulently assigned. On the other hand, like the present embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), the random number value to be a big hit is changed. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value that is a big hit for the special symbol, and thus it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 7A, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random number value is "0 to 59" is "big hit A". When the value is “60 to 99”, the jackpot type is “jackpot B”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. From the value of the first hit type counter C2 (random number value), the random number value for determining the jackpot type of the special symbol is set by a special symbol jackpot type table (not shown), and this table is It is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99, for example, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disengagement displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. Stop before and after "rear out-of-front reach" (eg 98, 99), and after the same reach is reached, "final stop symbol other than before and after the reach symbol" "reach other than out-of-front/outside reach" (for example 90-97 range), Three stop (effect) patterns of "completely disengaged" (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not reach are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

  From the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value), a random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a high probability of special symbols and a low probability of special symbols, and a range of random number values set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol, the low probability state of the special symbol, or the like.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary, so that the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of "complete deviation" is 0 to 89, which is a wide table for high probability. Is selected, and it becomes easy to select “completely missed”. In this table, the "front-rear outreach" is narrowed to 98,99 and the "reach other than front-rear outreach" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, and it is difficult to select "rear-rear outreach" or "reach other than front-rear-reach". Further, in the low probability state, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "complete deviation" is 0 to 79, which is a small probability. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "Completely missed".

  In this stop type selection table, the range of the random number values corresponding to the stop types of "reach other than out-of-front/back" is as wide as 80 to 97, and "reach other than out-of-front-rear" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, since many reach displays having a long effect time can be performed, it is possible to secure a ball entry time into the first entrance 64, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "out-of-front/rear reach" is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). It is acquired at the timing when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach or super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 24) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern table (not shown) that stores a random number value that determines one variation time of the symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. There is.

  In the fluctuation pattern table, for example, as fluctuation patterns for disconnection, "disconnection (for long time)", "disconnection (for short time)", "disconnection normal reach", "disconnection super reach", "disconnection special reach", etc. "Various types are defined, and various types of variation patterns for both jackpot A and jackpot B are defined, such as "shared normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach". Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, a fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed the second entrance (through gate) 67 on either the left or the right. It is acquired at the time of being stored and is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number that is a normal symbol hit is set by a normal symbol per random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is a normal symbol. When it matches the value of the random number which is a hit set by the hit random number table, it is determined as a normal symbol hit. In addition, this normal symbol per random number table is for the low probability of the normal symbol (the period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state), and when the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than that of the low probability (at the time of the normal symbol) It is divided into two types, one for a period of time saving state), and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers to be the winning, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 7(b), when the probability of a normal symbol is low, there are 24 random number values that are a hit of the normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28". These random number values are stored in the random number table per normal symbol for low probability. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 240, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 24, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

  When the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds×1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds×1 time”. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for “0.5 seconds×2 times”.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 200 random numbers that are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the random table per normal symbol for high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 240, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 200.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 is a normal symbol. Is displayed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for “1 second×2 times”. In this way, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds→3 seconds” as compared with the time of low probability of the ordinary symbol, and further, the release of the first entrance 64 Since the period is extremely long, that is, “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. In addition, a table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit is provided in the ROM 202 from the value of the second hit random number counter C4 (random number value). In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the first entrance 64 is opened for “1 second×2 times”, but is opened. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds×3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value=0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

  In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed according to the value of this counter or the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 6, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I/O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

  It should be noted that the RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on by eliminating power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before power-off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 24) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is performed by the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 23). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Further, the RAM 203, as shown in FIG. 5, a special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding sphere storing area 203b, a special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c, a normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d, and a time saving medium. It has a counter 203e and another memory area 203z.

  The special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a first random number counter C1. , The first type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas ( Among the vacant areas from the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area, the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the reserved first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main controller 110, when the special symbols are selected by lottery, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a are execution areas. Is shifted (moved) to, and based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

  When the data is shifted from the holding first area to the execution area, the holding first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into the holding area having the smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, only the holding areas (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which winning data is stored are shifted.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start prize), and as soon as each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is acquired according to the start prize, the original special symbol is acquired. Apart from the jackpot lottery, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired respective values of the counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various types obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data (each counter C1 to C3, each value of CS1) corresponding to the start winning. Predicting the information will be described as reading the special symbol lottery result in advance. It should be noted that various types of information include win/fail, stop type, and variation pattern.

  Then, when the pre-reading is completed, the winning information command including various information (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the prize information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the win/fail, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the prize information command, and uses them as the prize information in the prize information storage area of the RAM 233. 223a.

  In addition, in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, the winning/judgment determination result (pre-reading determination result) determined in S407 of the start winning process (S106 of FIG. 19) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 described later is also held. It is stored in each of the first to fourth areas.

  Like the special symbol holding sphere storing area 203a, the normal symbol holding sphere storing area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right second entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding Among the vacant areas of the (fourth area), the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main controller 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

  Incidentally, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the prizes stored in other reserved areas are stored in the same manner as the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed in which data is packed in a reserved area having a smaller area number by one. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, the variable display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry slot 64 (starting winning) This is a counter for counting the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to 4 times. The initial value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of holding balls in variable display increases, up to a maximum value of 1 They are added (see S404 in FIG. 16). On the other hand, the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 of FIG. 17).

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (holding number N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (S206 of FIG. 17, see S405 of FIG. 19). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed, and holds the variable display hold ball in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of balls for variable display managed by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the number of balls for actual fluctuation display held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated, the deviation can be corrected by the number of reserved balls received next.

  Note that the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the number of holding balls command, and the display holding device for notifying the number of holding balls to the display control device 114 every time the number of holding balls changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the command for number of reserved balls for display.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d, the number of holding balls (standby number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67. It is a counter that counts up to four times. The initial value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67 and the number of holding balls for variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. (See S704 of FIG. 21). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 20).

  When the sphere passes through either the right or left second entrance 67, if the value of this ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d (holding number M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol) is less than 4, a second random number per The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b (S705 of FIG. 21). On the other hand, when the sphere passes through either the right or left second entrance 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. No (S703: No in FIG. 21) is not performed.

  The time saving medium counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol. If the value of the hour/hour counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol. This time saving medium counter 203e, the initial value is set to zero, the lottery of the special symbol is performed in the main controller 110, and each time it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, a value corresponding to the big hit type is set. To be done. That is, when the special symbol is a big hit, a value corresponding to the big hit type is newly set regardless of how many times the time saving medium counter 203e is.

  Specifically, when it is determined that the "big hit B" is set to 100 (see S214 of FIG. 17). After that, until the value of the hour/hour counter 203e becomes 0, 1 is subtracted each time the special symbol variation effect ends (S217 in FIG. 17).

  When a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the hour/hour counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, a lottery for a normal symbol is performed based on the random symbol per ordinary symbol for high probability time. On the other hand, if the value of the hour/hour counter 203e is 0, based on the random symbol per ordinary symbol for low probability time, the ordinary symbol is drawn (see S610 and S611 in FIG. 20).

  The other memory area 203z is an area where the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 stores other various flags and data necessary for controlling the pachinko machine 10.

  An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open and close to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 201 sends various command and control signals to them via an input/output port 205. To send.

  Further, the input/output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown), and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processing is executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

  The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch handle 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is not operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

<Electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113>
The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). This is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

  An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the situation of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls the display of the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control for displaying an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay is performed.

  The ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores control programs necessary for various controls, various data, and the like. As a part thereof, a pre-reading effect lottery table 222a, a pre-reading number lottery table 222b, a pre-reading effect selection table 222c, and an effect content command selection table 222d are set.

  The prefetch effect lottery table 222a is a data table for determining whether or not the prefetch effect is present. The pre-reading effect lottery table 1 shown in FIG. 7(c) and the pre-reading effect lottery table 2 shown in FIG. 7(d). The pre-reading effect lottery table 222a is a data table used to draw lots with and without the pre-reading effect. In the process of S1603 of the prefetch effect lottery process (S1412 of FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, when it is determined that the jackpot determination flag 223e is ON, the prefetch effect lottery table 2 is selected. A pre-reading effect lottery is performed (S1604 in FIG. 29). On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot determination flag 223e is off, the prefetch effect lottery table 1 is selected and the prefetch effect lottery is performed (S1605 of FIG. 29). In the present embodiment, in the prefetch effect lottery table 2, the value of the effect counter 223h for selecting the prefetch effect is set to be larger, and the prefetch effect is more easily selected. Therefore, the pre-reading effect is easily executed when the jackpot winning command is received.

  The pre-reading number lottery table 222b is a data table for determining the number of pre-reading effects as shown in FIG. FIG. 8A is a diagram schematically showing an example of the prefetch number lottery table 222b. In the prefetch number lottery table 222b, the number of prefetch effects is selected based on the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the value of the effect counter 223h. The number of look-ahead effects is selected with the upper limit value as the number of reserved balls.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, the prefetch effect selection table 222c is based on the change pattern (special figure variations 1 to 5) of the final special symbol of the prefetch effect and the value of the prefetch effect counter. It is a data table for determining a notice effect (effects 1 to 3). FIG. 8B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the prefetch effect selection table 222c. In addition, the variation pattern of the special symbol for which the prefetching effect is executed is simplified and shown as special symbol variations 1 to 5. Actually, one of the effects 1 to 3 is assigned to each variation pattern. Further, the notice effect is not limited to the effects 1 to 3, and may be set appropriately.

  As the notice effect of the prefetch effect, effects as shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, respectively. Specifically, in the notice effect of the effect 1, characters indicating the number of times corresponding to the number of prefetch effects (the value of the prefetch effect counter) shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C are displayed, and the background color is blue. Is displayed. Similarly, in the notice effect of the effect 2, characters indicating the number of times corresponding to the number of prefetch effects (value of the prefetch effect counter) shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C are displayed, and the background color is displayed in yellow. It In the notice effect of the effect 3, a character indicating the number of times corresponding to the number of prefetch effects (value of the prefetch effect counter) shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C is displayed, and the background color is displayed in red.

  In this way, since the notice display mode (effects 1 to 3) selected for each number of pre-reading effects is set for the variation pattern, for example, a red background color is often present for the jackpot variation pattern. By setting so that the background color of red is hard to be selected for the variation pattern (super reach) of out-of-range, it is possible to make the player expect the jackpot with the background color. it can.

  Further, if the number of pre-reading effects is large and the change pattern is judged to be a big hit, a large red background color is set to be selected (that is, for the change pattern of the big hit, the value of the pre-reading effect counter is 3). In that case, the effect 3 is set to a large number, and for the variation pattern of the deviation, when the value of the effect counter is 3, the effect 1 or the effect 2 is set to be selected more than the effect 3). As a result, the more notice display of the pre-reading effect, the more the effect that the player can expect to win the jackpot.

  The effect content command selection table 222d is for selecting a command for notifying the display control device 114 of the type of the notice effect of the prefetching effect (no effect or effects 1 to 3) as shown in FIG. 8D. Is a data table of. Specifically, in the prefetch effect selection table 222c, if no effect is selected, the command “90h00h” is selected, if effect 1 is selected, the command “90h01h” is selected, and effect 2 is selected. For example, the command “90h02h” is selected, and when the effect 3 is selected, the command “90h03h” is selected.

  As the display prefetch command, if it is the first prefetch effect (the value of the prefetch counter in the prefetch effect counter storage area 223f is 1), the 90h01h command is given the first number of times and the display prefetch of 90h11h is performed. The command is set. At this time, if it is the second time, the command of 90h01h is set as the display prefetch command of 90h21h. Similarly, for the third time, the command of 90h01h is set as the display prefetch command of 90h31h. The display prefetch commands for the effects 2 and 3 are set in the same manner.

  The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a variation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a big hit determination flag 223e, and a prefetch effect counter. At least a storage area 223f, a look-ahead number counter storage area 223g, an effect counter 223h, and another memory area 223z are provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control unit 110 has a start prize, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize. From, from the main control unit 110, various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated), and the various predicted information is The main controller 110 notifies the voice lamp controller 113 by a prize information command.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, when the winning information command is received, various information notified by the winning information command (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is changed to the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). To be done. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol reservation sphere number counter 223b, like the special symbol reservation sphere counter 203c of the main controller 110, is a variable effect (variation display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable effect pending in the main controller 110 up to a maximum of four times.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b manages the holding ball number. Has become.

  Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first ball inlet 64, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main controller 110. When the number of holding balls is subtracted, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c of the main control device 110 is acquired from the holding ball number command, and the special It is stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S1409 in FIG. 27). Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is updated according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is used to display the holding ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and after storing the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, the display holding ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  In the display control device 114, when receiving the display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball number for the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b is changed in value in synchronization with the special symbol holding sphere number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere numbers displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is set to ON when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1402 in FIG. 27), and when fluctuation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. It is set to OFF (see S1702 in FIG. 30). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is set to ON when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1405 in FIG. 27), and when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. Is set to off (see S1607 in FIG. 30).

  The jackpot determination flag 223e is a flag that indicates that a jackpot winning command, which gives a jackpot determination result from the main control device 110, has been received. This jackpot determination flag 223e is set to ON in the process of S1411 of the command determination process (FIG. 27, S1312) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and is set to OFF in the process of S1413. When the jackpot winning command is received, this jackpot flag 223e is set to ON, and if the jackpot flag 223e is ON in the later-described prefetching effect lottery processing (FIG. 29, S1412), there is prefetching. The pre-reading effect lottery table 222a that is easy to select the judgment is selected. The jackpot determination flag 223e is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial setting when the power is turned on.

  The prefetch effect counter storage area 223f is a storage area in which the value of the prefetch effect counter is stored. The pre-reading effect counter is incremented by 1 when the pre-reading effect is set in the process of S1504 of the pre-reading effect selection process (FIG. 28, S1403) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the pre-reading effect counter is added. It is stored in the counter storage area 223f. The prefetch effect counter is initially set to 0 and is incremented by 1 up to the upper limit value 4.

  The prefetch count counter storage area 223g is a storage area in which the number of prefetch effects is stored. In the process of S1611 of the prefetch effect lottery process (FIG. 29, S1412) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, the number of prefetch effects acquired from the prefetch number lottery table 222b is stored.

  The staging counter 223h is a counter value used in a case where a pre-notification staging is performed, a pre-staging effect lottery table 222a is used for lottery, and a pre-reading staging number is selected from the pre-reading number lottery table 222b. The effect counter 223h is a counter value that is incremented by 1 and updated each time the main processing performed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The value is repeatedly updated up to 99. The effect counter 223d is a counter value which is set to 0 which is an initial value when the power is cut off.

  The RAM 223 also has another storage area 223z for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the processing corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 30) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination processing causes The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (fluctuation) Control). Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

<Electrical Configuration of Display Control Device 114>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp controller 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and the output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot is different. Since there are models having completely the same specifications, the display control device 114 is a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the MPU 231 can be reset by the power supply device 115. When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is released. Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead of storing the data, the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the character ROM 234 stores the control program and the like, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data consecutively arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is designated for reading the data of the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading out data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read out. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow reading speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the commands constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. To store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. Thereby, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2 and further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control program and the fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and, for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Is read and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, in the NAND flash memory 234a, due to its nature, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur during data writing, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Convert the data address of.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 to generate various images.

  Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes a defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 cause the NAND flash memory 234a to have different defective data. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b includes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the designated address. Data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside or uses the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to specify the data in one bank while the other bank is used. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first releases the system reset. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes the boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. It should be noted that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is set appropriately according to the specifications of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and also designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and adds the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address designated by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, all the control programs are not stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but a predetermined number of commands from the first command to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that, in reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset in the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b or the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a different bank from the buffer RAM 234c.

  Since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The transfer program can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c again is unnecessary, and the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a is transferred. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a causes the first predetermined storage area of the program storage area 233a. It is set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. It is programmed so as to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot programs contained in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program storage. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 31) executed after the boot process (see S1801 in FIG. 32) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is completely executed by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  As described above, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, it is possible to suppress the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. You can

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 13) transmitted from the MPU 231, and selects one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. While developing the image drawn in the buffer, by outputting the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing processing of the image for one frame and the display processing of the image for one frame for the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). Parallel processing in.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives the image controller 237 a drawing instruction. Therefore, the image controller 237 causes the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored according to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a slower reading speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Is configured to. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main controller 110 or the display controller 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until displaying some image on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to draw from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The MPU 231 issues an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 according to a transfer instruction or transfer data information of a drawing list, and the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is to be transferred), and the start of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a according to the various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a. The image data stored in the RAM is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is stored.

  As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. You can Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing, and as a result, the image drawing and the image drawing are performed by a necessary time. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, since the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and the third symbol display. The unused period for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during power-on, and at power-on the main image area 235a, rear image area 235c, character pattern area. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f being provided, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the time the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. Further, in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entrance into the first entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image that displays the lottery result in the main control device 110 by the fluctuation effect when it is performed.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1803 and S1804 in FIG. 31).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after power-on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image (in the present embodiment, The character being turned on) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control unit 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 which is the variation start instruction command, the display control unit 114 causes the power-on main image to be displayed. On the display screen of, the power-on fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position toward the screen, and the power-on fluctuation image of the "X" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol, the fluctuation period. Display alternately and alternately. Then, from the variation pattern command for display and the stop type command for display transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed in the main controller 110 is selected. Judging the result, if it is a “special symbol big hit”, the “○” image is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped, and if it is “a special symbol is off”, the “x” image is changed after the effect is stopped. Display for a certain period.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instruct to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, a player or a person related to the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without any anxiety that the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. You can

  Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts its operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It is possible to immediately confirm that the operation is being performed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from being deteriorated.

  Further, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the power-on fluctuation image area The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the "○" and "x" images are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the variation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple change effect even while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, so the power-on is performed. When a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 9, the explanation is continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with the numbers “0” to “9” being the third symbols are resident. As a result, when performing the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, and therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 is used. The variation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the occurrence of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, although the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as main symbols without numbers from "0" to "9", main symbols consisting of rear symbols such as a wooden box, characters such as rear symbols and planers, furoshiki, helmets, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of an attached symbol imitating is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even after a lapse of a predetermined time after one variable effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without the number as the third symbol is displayed in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and display control is performed by resident data corresponding to these characters in the character symbol area 235e. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but rather in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data that is resident in advance. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately even if the NAND ROM flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of the vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. In the display control device 114, when the error command is received, an error message corresponding to the received error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoints of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is previously resident in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114, based on the received error command, displays the error message in the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance in the image area 235f, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even when the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 outputs the image data necessary for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area in which the image data is stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by the MPU 231 including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and therefore the processing load can be reduced.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes the image of one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 into either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame of the frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and together with the drive signal, to the third symbol display device 81. Then, by transmitting the image information, the process for displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  In this way, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer, and at the same time It is possible to read out the image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are the drawing processing of the image for one frame. The MPU 231 alternately and designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds to complete.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81. By using, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table that describes the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one presentation displayed by the table and a transfer data table which defines transfer timing.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device. Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110, for example, variable effect, round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demonstration effect are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the fluctuating effect is started, if the stop type of the fluctuating effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the disengagement is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuating effect is a big hit A and a big hit B. If either of the above, the stop symbols shown for each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The ending effect notifies the player of the end of the special game state, and also informs the player of the game value (ordinary symbol time saving period) given to the player after the jackpot is over, or a special symbol that is held This is an effect for notifying the player that the lottery result will be a big hit in the lottery.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect due to the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is a staging effect, and the third symbol, which is the main symbol to which the numbers “0” to “9” are not added, is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the hall related person can recognize that the game is not being performed on the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect, ending effect, and demonstration effect is stored. As for the variable display data table which is the display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table for each variable effect pattern, 32 tables in total are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address representing a time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which an image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

  For the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 which should display the sprite. The magnifying power is information for designating a magnifying power with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnifying power. If the enlargement ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for identifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) As the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, light in the image Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, a boy image, a character used for various effects such as characters, and the like is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in that frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the semitransparent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back surface type which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image. This rear surface type displays one of the rear surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected from the player (one of the “town stage”, the “empty stage”, and the “island stage”) or the rear surface A to Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, the back surface type also includes information that specifies which back surface image is to be displayed when specifying that a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed.

  When it is specified by this rear surface type to display any of the rear surfaces A to C, the MPU 231 specifies the rear surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the rear surfaces A to C as a drawing target. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface image to be displayed is specified based on the back surface type.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead of this, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type The position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time after the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is the drawing of the image based on the information and the display data table indicating the elapsed time since the display of the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position according to the back surface type (or the third symbol display device 81). Display) may be any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back surface type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time after the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating whether or not) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  The third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Has the symbol type offset information as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Enter the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd design is given a unique number, the variation design in the previous variation effect and the stop design according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are the 3rd design. It is possible to easily identify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information by managing the number attached to the symbol and displaying the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

  Further, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined symbol is changed from the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. The time is set to be displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, so during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one symbol offset information before is displayed. Even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted by switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect that is being performed this time, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the rendering content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table. Is listed.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command from the main controller 110 and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing processing for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, An image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 15) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to the command (for example, the display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110, or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. ..

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, like a conventional pachinko machine, when the effect image is diversified, Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of a complicated and enormous program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, which may limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

<Preliminary data table for prefetching>
Next, the details of the notice data table will be described with reference to FIG. The notice data tables 1 to 3 shown in FIGS. 11A to 11C are notice data tables for displaying the notice effect of the prefetching effect shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C.

  Specifically, the advance notice data table 1 shown in FIG. 11A shows the “first time” display shown in FIG. 12A on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing for a predetermined number of seconds (in the present embodiment, , Is a notice data table for instructing to display for 3 seconds from 1.5 seconds before the change stop of the changing special symbol. The notice data table 2 shown in FIG. 11(b) shows the “second time” display shown in FIG. It is a notice data table for instructing to display for 3 seconds from 1.5 seconds before the stop of fluctuation of the special symbol. The notice data table 3 shown in FIG. 11(c) displays the “third time” display shown in FIG. It is an advance notice data table for instructing to display for 3 seconds from 1.5 seconds before the stop of fluctuation of the special symbol.

  Similar to the display data table, various types of data necessary for the advance notice display are set in the advance notice data tables 1 to 3, respectively. The notice data tables 1 to 3 select the notice data tables based on the display prefetch command based on the determination that the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 has received the display prefetch command. Actually, the notice data tables 1 to 3 are composed of three types of notice data tables 1 to 3 of effects 1 to 3 having different background colors. That is, even in the notice data table 1, the notice data table 1 with a blue background color (corresponding to effect 1), the notice data table 1 with a yellow background color (corresponding to effect 2), and the red background color (effect 3) The corresponding notice data table 1) is set. The notice data table 2 and the notice data table 3 are set in the same manner.

  The advance notice data table selected based on the display prefetch command is set in the advance notice data table buffer 233k of the display control device 114. Then, the image controller 237 reads out the image data designated by the set advance notice display data table from the character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 and stores it in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Further, the timekeeping data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h based on the time data set in the notice display data table, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the timing set in the notice data table. The notice display mode displayed in the notice data table is set to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in preference to the display mode instructed in the display data table.

  As a result, when the notice data table is set, the notice display mode is displayed from 1.5 seconds before the variation stop timing of the special symbol in the variation display, and for 3 seconds thereafter, it is set in the display data table. The displayed display mode is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the notification display mode set in the notification data table is displayed. Therefore, the stop display of the special symbol can be hidden in the notice display mode, and even if the start of the variation of the special symbol based on the next hold starts, the notice display mode is displayed for 1.5 seconds, so the next variation The display mode of the fluctuation start can also be hidden by the advance notice display mode, and the player can be made to look as if it is one fluctuation even if there are two fluctuations. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the notification of the disconnection, and it is possible to show the player up to the last change of the prefetching effect. As a result, the final round of the look-ahead production is composed of a variation mode of out-of-range super-reach or jackpot, so the player can enjoy watching the notice display mode while expecting that the variation of the final round is a jackpot. it can.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

  The transfer data table is associated with an address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) at which transfer is to be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 14). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data table is set, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in the transfer data table in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined (meaning address “0002H” in FIG. 12).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address Is included.

  As in the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the last address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 14, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is listed.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d to create a drawing list (see FIG. 15) described later. At the same time, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite at which transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is stored in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 14, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data for which transfer should be started, and it is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the character "initializing" which is the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag. This simple image display flag 233c is provided after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , Is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 231 (see S1805 in FIG. 31). Then, by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S3405 in FIG. 41B).

  This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2101 in FIG. 33B), and If the image display flag 233c is turned on, the simple command determination process (see S2108 of FIG. 33B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 33B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 33(b) S2109) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 34 to 37) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 38 to 40) are executed.

  When the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 41A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Performs resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 41(b)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 42) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 16) in which the instruction contents of the image drawing for the is described is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is displayed for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 15) describing the drawing instruction contents is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data, which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 specifies the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f by one. If so (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 15) that describes the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. For specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interruption process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interruption signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. )), the pointer update process (see S3005 in FIG. 40) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d every time such pointer 233f is updated, and the drawing list described later. (See FIG. 13), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite at which transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add information to the created drawing list.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed. Therefore, it is possible to display a wide variety of effects regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. The image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructing 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 15, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, Design, 2,...), effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), character (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball count symbol 1, Reserved ball count symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, information indicating a RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the magnification ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value. Processing is performed, composite processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the information specified by the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of another image to be drawn (for example, a hold number that displays a hold sphere count symbol). And detailed warning information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing the image for one frame based on the image and the warning image for notifying the occurrence of an error, and the detailed information for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, of the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 is dependent on the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) in the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and draws detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) And effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) , Character (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number pattern 1, Reserved ball number pattern 2,..., Error pattern (not shown), advance notice display notice display 1 to 3), respectively, in that order. The detailed information corresponding to the sprite is described.

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side. As a result, when any of the notice data tables 1 to 3 is set, the corresponding notice display mode in FIGS. Displayed on the front side. Therefore, the notice display mode can be displayed in the entire display area of the third symbol display device 81 so as to hide the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the image corresponding to the notice data table is set at the end of the drawing list to display the notice display mode on the forefront side. When an image is set, only the image based on the notice data table may be set in the drawing list. With this configuration, the process of creating the drawing list can be simplified and the control load can be reduced.

  When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 acquires the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 displays an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. ) Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3008 of FIG. 38). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Performs various processes that should be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that the image data corresponding to each sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S1802 in FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage states for all the sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 231. Be seen. In this update, the storage state corresponding to the one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "ON" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite will always be in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3517 in FIG. 42). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3518 in FIG. 42). The image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wasteful transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 43).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information that has already been developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and the image is displayed to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process is executed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 33B) is executed (see S3602 in FIG. 43).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Control processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 16 to 24. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is regularly started (at an interval of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of description, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a regular process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first random type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, as a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed (S104), and thereafter, A start winning process associated with a win (start winning) into the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19.

  After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for displaying in the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S106), and the through-gate passage accompanying the passage of the ball in the second entrance 67 is performed. The process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21. After the through-gate passage processing is executed, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and other processing that should be executed periodically is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a and that the hit switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated, and the ball is fired. Is a process for determining whether to turn on or off. The main control unit 110 instructs the firing control unit 112 to launch a sphere when the sphere launch is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17, a special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device. This is processing for controlling the variable display of the third symbol and the like performed at 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S201). As during the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing the big hit of the special symbol (including the big hit game of the special symbol), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  If the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (the number N of times of variable display holding in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A reserved sphere number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved sphere number counter 203c is set (S206). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 26) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the reserved ball number command, extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

  After setting the reserved ball number command in the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the holding first area to the holding fourth area of the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area side in order. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. Yes (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time If has not elapsed (S209: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S209, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and in the case of a special symbol big hit, depending on the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of the big hit A, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and in the case of the big hit B, the red LED is turned on. If it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. It should be noted that the display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change is stopped.

  After the process of S210 is finished, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the result of the lottery this time is a jackpot of the special symbol (S211: Yes), the jackpot type is determined from the jackpots of the two types of special symbols (the jackpot A and the jackpot B) (S212), and the jackpot type. Is a big hit A, the setting related to the big hit A is executed (S213). In the setting related to the jackpot A, the number of jackpot rounds (16 rounds in this embodiment) and the probability variation jackpot are set (S213). If it is the big hit B, the number of big hit rounds (16 rounds in the present embodiment) and the number of time saving (100 times in the present embodiment) are set (S214). Then, the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set (S215), and this processing is ended.

  In the process of S211, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the hour/hour counter 203e is 1 or more (S216). When it is determined that the value of the hour/hour counter 203e is 1 or more (S216: Yes), the value of the hour/hour counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S217), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the value of the hour/hour counter 203e is 0 (S216: No), the process of S221 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, a special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 17) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and is the execution area of the special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a. Based on the value of the various counters stored in the "special symbol jackpot" or "out of the special symbol" lottery (judgment determination), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 This is a process for determining an effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of a fluctuating effect that is referred to.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a are acquired. Yes (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the current game state is a high probability state (during probability change) (S302). When in the high-probability gaming state (S302: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high-probability time (S304).

  In the process of S304, based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained. Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number values of 30 stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability one by one. As described above, as the random number value that is a big hit for the special symbol, "4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168. , 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299" are set, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and these hits are set. When the random numbers match with, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S306.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when the game state is the low probability game state (normal game state) (S302: No), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the low probability time Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol jackpot is obtained (S305). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number values of 3 stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability one by one. Three random numbers "7,107,282" are set as the random numbers that are the big hits of the special symbol, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number that is the hit are the same. , Determined to be a jackpot of special symbols. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S306.

  Then, the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S304 or S305 determines whether or not it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S306), and when it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S306: Yes), The display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) (S307). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined (S308). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S308, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third until the big hit symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 from a fluctuation pattern table (not shown), normal reach, super reach, etc. Determine the variation pattern (variation time). The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by this fluctuation pattern table.

  For example, as the variation patterns for disengagement, various types such as "disengagement", "normal reach disassociation", "super reach disassociation", and "special reach disassociation" are defined. As the variation pattern for jackpot A, various “probable variation jackpot normal reach”, “variable confirmation variation jackpot super reach”, and “variable probability variation jackpot special reach” are defined. As variation pattern for jackpot B, various “normal jackpot normal reach” are provided. , "Regular jackpot super reach" and "Regular jackpot special reach" are stipulated.

  In the process of S306, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S306: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S309). In the process of S309, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the deviating symbol.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined from a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) (S310). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation pattern of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. (Variation time) is determined.

  When the process of S308 or the process of S310 is finished, next, a change pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the change pattern determined in the process of S308 or the process of S310 is set (S311). A stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type (stop type at the time of jackpot) is set (S312). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 24). It The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the process of S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 19, the start winning processing (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball entrance 64, and if there is a starting prize. Is a process for executing a process for holding the value indicated by each random number counter.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (holding number N of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol holding number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether there is no prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S415. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol holding ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 24) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the reserved ball number command, extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

  After the number of reserved balls command is set in the process of S405, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the change type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt process. Each value is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area. Then, the process of S407 is executed.

  In the process of S407, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in S406 is determined to be a big hit at the start of fluctuation. Whether the gaming state at the start of fluctuation is a high-probability gaming state or a low-probability gaming state is determined from the determination result of the reserved ball stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and the determination of the success or failure is made. Perform in advance (pre-reading judgment of the judgment result). In the process of S407, not only the result of the judgment, but also the stop type and the variation pattern are determined and stored in the corresponding holding area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  In the process of S407, when it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit (S407: Yes), a jackpot winning command, which is a kind of winning information command, is set based on the stop type and the variation pattern (S408). Here, for example, if the jackpot A is a super reach, a jackpot winning command corresponding thereto is set. On the other hand, in the process of S402, when it is determined that the variation is out (S407: No), it is determined whether the variation pattern is super reach (S409). In the processing of S409, when it is determined that the variation pattern is super reach (S409: Yes), a miss reach prize command, which is a kind of prize information command, is set (S409). On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern is a variation pattern different from the super reach (S409: No), a deviation winning command, which is a kind of winning information command, is set (S411).

  The winning information command, when set, is output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, a normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S601). As the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hitting, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is performed while the indication indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is not hitting (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the processing of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the ordinary symbol reserved sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the hour/hour counter 203e of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). Incidentally, the time saving medium counter 203e is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol.

  When the value of the hour/hour counter 203e is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently a big hit (S609). As during the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing the big hit of the special symbol (including the big hit game of the special symbol), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. If the result of determination is that the special symbol is a big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is less likely to hit. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball to win the special winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first winning opening 64 is opened. This is to prevent the ball, which is about to win the special winning opening 65a, from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. Since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening 64 can be prevented from entering the first winning opening 64 during the big hit of the special symbol. Many balls enter the ball entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first ball inlet 64 becomes maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state.

  In the process of S609, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not during the special symbol big hit, and since the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is acquired by the process of S607. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number per ordinary symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is won is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", Usually it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 7(b)).

  In the process of S608, when the value of the hour/hour counter 203e is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 and the low value. Based on the random symbol per ordinary symbol for probability, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is won is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second per random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", Usually it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 7B).

  Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 determines whether or not it is a hit of the normal symbol (S612), and when it is determined that it is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612: Yes) , The display mode at the time of winning is set (S613). In the processing of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "○" is set to be illuminated and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S614), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the present is now a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to prevent the ball from entering the first ball entrance 64 as much as possible, even if it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case of the deviation of the ordinary symbol. The number of times the electric accessory is opened and the opening time are set.

  In the process of S615, if the special symbol is not in the big hit (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, so the first entrance The opening period of the electric accessory accompanying 64 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the hour/hour counter 203e is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is 0. .. is set to 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out (S612: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S618). In the processing of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be lit up as a stopped symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S619), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203e is 1 or more (S619: Yes), fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83. The display variation time is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the hour/hour counter 203e is 0 (S619: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing is ended. In this way, except when the special symbol big hit, when the high probability of the normal symbol, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", further, The opening period of the first entrance 64 is extremely long, which is “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, so that the ball easily enters the first entrance 64.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Yes (S622). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the processing of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit up) on the second symbol display device 83. Display) is set. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is missed and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is performed when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 24) is executed next. When the display is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

  Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this time lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process is the hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is set (S625), and the present process ends. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the processing in S625, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening/closing processing (see S1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 24) is executed next. Is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through-gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 16), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67, and if the ball has passed, This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through-gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S701). Here, the passage of a ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d (the number M of times of variable display holding in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed the second ball inlet 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed the second ball inlet 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 If it is not less than (S703: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, the ball passes through the second entrance 67 (S701: Yes), and, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number The value (M) of the counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. This area is stored in the area (S705), and this processing ends. In the process of S705, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

  Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 111, and the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup processing is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Next, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is set to ON (S904). If it is set to ON (S904: Yes), the process is S912. Move to. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not set to ON (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No), there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally. Therefore, also in this case, the process proceeds to S912.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case also, the process proceeds to S912. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1014 of FIG. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization process (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization processing (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the initialization processing of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not set to ON (S904: No), the information on occurrence of power failure is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal. If so (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S908). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, the production permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various productions. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a regular process of 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 16), output data such as a command stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral device). The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 16) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls acquired to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 17) and the starting winning process (see FIG. 19) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 with the number-of-holding-balls command set. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, the electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 20), the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the first symbol display updating process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 18), the variation display according to the variation pattern, the first symbol display Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the variation time elapses after the variation is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED. If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 18) ends, the first symbol display device The variation display being executed in 37 is ended, and in the display mode set by the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 18), the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 20), the variation display is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display update process, if the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 20), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. End the variable display, and in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 20), stop the stop symbol (second symbol) on the second symbol display device 83. Display (lighting display).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001 and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1009: No), during the remaining time until reaching the predetermined time, that is, the execution timing of the next main processing, The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are respectively stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

  In addition, in the processing of S1008, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 22 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1012 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1013). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

  The processing of S1008 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed at S1001 to S1007 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 similarly to the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the power-off process, the stack pointer is not saved in the initial setting process (S901). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

<Control Processing Executed by MPU 221 of Audio Lamp Control Unit 113>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 30. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on and a main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

  First, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S1318 (see FIG. 26) occurs due to a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”) in the startup processing of this time. It is determined whether or not it was started during the execution of () (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 26, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1315 of FIG. 26), the power-off process of S1318 is executed. The power-off processing in progress flag is set to ON before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing in-process flag is set to OFF after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1318 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

  If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1202: No), the startup processing this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred, and the power-off in S1318 is performed. It is started after completing the execution of the process, or is started (without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

  The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not “55AAh”, it is possible to confirm the data destruction in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-on process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to power-off). Then, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, the startup process of this time is started after the momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process of S1318 is completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S1202: Yes), the startup processing of this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S1318, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, and therefore the process proceeds to S1204, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the processing of S1204, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, and it is confirmed whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

  If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1206). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read/write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You can

  In the process of S1208, it is determined whether the power-off flag is set to ON (S1208). The power-off flag is set to ON when the power-off process of S1318 is executed (see S1317 of FIG. 26). In other words, the power-off flag is set to ON before the power-off process of S1318 is executed, and therefore, the process of S1208 is performed with the power-off flag set to ON when the current startup process is performed. This is the case after the momentary power failure has occurred and is started in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S1318 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1211), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing the commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the process of S1208 is reached when the power-off flag is set to OFF, because the present startup process is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, the processes of S1204 to S1206 are performed. This is the case where the processing of S1208 has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been reset (started without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1209, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and then the interrupt permission is set. Then (S1211), the process proceeds to the main process.

  It should be noted that the clear processing of S1209 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1204 when the processing of S1208 is reached through the processing of S1204 and S1206. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed from the start of the main process or the process of S1301 this time (S1301), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the processes of S1302 to S1310. In the process of S1301, the process of determining whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly for S1302 to S1310 related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S1312, the variable display setting process, the command determination process of S1311, and the process of updating the counter values of S1313 and S1314 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1311 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1311 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. On the basis of the above, it is possible to make the setting regarding the variation effect without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1311 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1302). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described below is set (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not when the power is turned on, the process proceeds to S1305 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, the held quantity display updating process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting production process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the title screen, and the setting is controlled as a command. Device 114. In the number-of-holds display updating process, a process of turning on a holding lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is performed.

  After that, the frame button input monitoring/effect process is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring/production process (S1307), the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the effect is monitored and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process of setting to produce an effect corresponding to. In this processing, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  If the frame effect is pressed while the variation effect is not executed or during the high-speed variation period, the stage change process is performed, and the back image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear surface image corresponding to the changed stage in the rear surface image change command, the display control device 114 causes the rear surface image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to be an image corresponding to the stage. The process of changing to. In addition, when the preview character appears at the start of variable display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the big hit due to this change, and pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production gives the expectation to the big hit. It is also possible to change to a holding effect or to use the frame button 22 as an enter button for selecting one reach effect from a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1307 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring/effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is executed (S1308), and then the sound edit/output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1309, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process proceeds to S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound edit/output process of S1309 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1311, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1311). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S1312). In this variation display setting process (S1312), a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. . As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the processing of S1312 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1313). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1315 (S1313: Yes), the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are both turned on (S1315), and the power-off process is executed (S1316). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S1317), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the information on the occurrence of power failure is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1315 (S1313: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1314), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1314: No), the process returns to S1301 to repeatedly execute the main process. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1314: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and thus can call a store clerk or the like in the hall and request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, a command determination process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1311). This command determination process (S1311) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 26) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the command received from the main control device 110 is determined. ..

  In the command determination process (S1311), first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area and analyzed, and the main control device 110 changes the variation pattern. It is determined whether a command has been received (S1401). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1402). Next, the prefetch effect selection process is executed (S1403). The details of the prefetching effect selection process (S1403) will be described later with reference to FIG. 28. The process of determining and setting the display prefetch command based on the determination is executed.

  After S1403 is executed, the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1404), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 30) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, when the variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), it is then determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1405). When the stop type command is received (S1405: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1406), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1407), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 30) described later is executed. Then, it is used for setting a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the change effect stop type.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1405: No), then it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1408). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1408: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 (special symbol The variable display hold count N) is extracted and stored in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1409). Further, in the process of S1409, the display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b is set. After the processing of S1409 ends, the processing returns to the main processing.

  Here, since the number of reserved balls command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the balls win the first ball entrance 64 (start prize), or when the special symbol lottery is performed, the start prize. Each time is detected, or each time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed by the processing of S1409 to the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110. It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, even if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110, at the time of detection of the start winning or special At the time of the lottery of symbols, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1409 is executed, the display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1408, when the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S1408: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot winning command has been received (S1410). When it is determined that the jackpot winning command has been received (S1410: Yes), the jackpot determination flag 223e is set to ON (S1411). Then, the prefetch effect lottery process is executed (S1412). Details of the prefetch effect lottery process (S1412) will be described later with reference to FIG. Processing for determining whether or not by lottery is executed. After the prefetch effect lottery process (FIG. 29, S1412) is executed, the jackpot determination flag 223e is set to OFF (S1413).

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1410, when it is determined that the jackpot winning command has not been received (S1410: No), it is determined whether or not the out-reach winning command has been received (S1414). When it is determined that the out-reach winning command is received (S1414: Yes), the prefetch effect lottery process is executed (S1412). Then, the process of S1413 is executed. On the other hand, in the processing of S1414, when it is determined that the miss reach command has not been received (S1414: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and processing according to the received command. Is executed (S1415), and the process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed controlled. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the prefetch effect selection process (S1403) which is one process of the command determination process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this prefetching effect selection processing (S1403).

  In the prefetch effect selection process (S1403), first, it is determined whether the variation pattern determined by the voice lamp control device 113 is a jackpot variation pattern (S1501). When it is determined that the variation pattern is a big hit (S1501: Yes), both the prefetch effect counter and the prefetch count counter are initialized and set (S1502). Although not shown, when the process of S1502 is executed, the prefetch effect is set. Then, this process is completed. In this way, if the change in the big hit, the pre-reading effect is not set, and the pre-reading effect counter and the pre-reading number counter are set so that the pre-reading effect is not executed until the change is set again with the pre-reading effect. It is initialized and set to no read ahead. As a result, in the change of the big hit, the notice display mode of the prefetch effect is displayed from the timing 1.5 seconds before the change of the special symbol, and the big sign is displayed to the player on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to prevent a problem that is not notified by a special symbol that is given.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the variation pattern received by the voice lamp control device 113 is incorrect (S1501: Yes), it is determined whether the prefetch effect is set to be present. Whether or not this prefetch effect is set is determined by whether the prefetch effect flag is set to ON in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. The prefetch effect flag is set to ON in the process of S1610 of the prefetch effect lottery process (FIG. 29, S1412) described below.

  In the process of S1503, when it is determined that the prefetch effect is not set (the prefetch effect flag is off) (S1503: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the prefetch effect is set (S1503: Yes), the prefetch effect counter is incremented by 1 and stored in the prefetch effect counter storage area 223f (S1504). The pre-reading effect is acquired based on the pre-reading effect selection table 222c (see FIG. 8B) and the value of the pre-reading counter stored in the pre-reading effect counter storage area 223f. Here, for example, when the variation pattern received by the voice lamp control device 113 is a variation pattern indicating the special figure variation 1, and the value of the prefetch counter is 1, the prefetching effect of effect 1 (background color is blue) is selected. It From the selected pre-reading effect value, the display pre-reading command with the number of times is selected (set) from the effect content command selection table 222d (S1506).

  Here, if the pre-reading effect of the effect 1 is selected in the process of S1505 and the first pre-reading effect (the value of the pre-reading counter of the pre-reading effect counter storage area 223f is 1), the command of 90h01h is executed the first time. Is added and the display prefetch command of 90h11h is set. At this time, if it is the second time, the command of 90h01h is set as the display prefetch command of 90h21h. Similarly, for the third time, the command of 90h01h is set as the display prefetch command of 90h31h. The display prefetch commands for the effects 2 and 3 are set in the same manner.

  Therefore, when the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 receives the display prefetch command from the voice lamp control device 113, the advance notice display mode of the prefetch effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display prefetch command is the number of times. It is possible to determine whether it is a notice display and select and set a notice data table corresponding to the background colors of the effects 1 to 3.

  After the process of S1506 is executed, it is determined whether or not the value of the prefetch counter of the prefetch effect counter storage area 223f is the same as the value of the prefetch counter stored (set) in the prefetch counter storage area 223g. (S1507). When it is determined that the value of the prefetching effect counter and the value of the prefetching number counter are the same (S1507: Yes), the prefetching effect flag of the other storage area 223z is set to OFF and no prefetching effect is set. , An initial value 0 is set in the prefetch number counter storage area 223g (the prefetch number counter is initialized). On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the prefetching effect counter and the value of the prefetching number counter are different (S1507: No), this process ends.

  As described above, when execution of the prefetching effect is set, the display prefetching command is set so that the notice display (the number of times display) of the prefetching effect based on the number of times is displayed. Further, the background color is selected from the look-ahead effect selection table 222c according to the selected variation pattern. Here, from the prefetching effect selection table 222c, the content of the effect selected is changed according to the type of the variation pattern of the final time of the prefetching effect. More specifically, the effect 3 having a red background color is more easily selected as the variation pattern has a longer variation time. Further, the shorter the variation time is, the easier the blue or yellow background color is selected. Furthermore, when a variation pattern having a long variation time is selected, even if the number of prefetch effects is small (the value of the prefetch effect counter is small), the effect 3 with a red background color is easily selected. .

  In addition, since a variation pattern with a long variation time is often set for a special reach or the like in which the hit/miss determination result is successful, when the effect 3 of the red background color is displayed, the player is in an early stage (first time or 2 times). It is possible to play the game with the expectation that the special reach will be executed from the notice display of the prefetching effect for the second time). Further, in the prefetch effect selection table 222c, as the number of prefetch effects is greater (the value of the prefetch effect counter is higher), the effect 3 having a red background color is more easily selected, and conversely the number of prefetch effects is low. The smaller the value of the prefetch effect counter is, the easier it is to select effect 1 or effect 2 that is a blue or yellow background color. Therefore, the player can easily identify the number of look-ahead effects.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the prefetch effect lottery process (S1412), which is one process of the command determination process (FIG. 27, S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the prefetch effect lottery process (S1412).

  In the pre-reading effect lottery process (FIG. 29, S1312), first, from the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the voice lamp control device 113, one of the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area is stored. It is determined whether there is a change in the jackpot or out-of-range super reach (S1601). Here, in the prize information storage area 223a, based on the prize information command received from the main control device 110, the pre-reading success/failure determination information, the stop type, and the variation pattern information are individually stored in correspondence with the reserved numbers. Therefore, it is determined based on that information.

  In the processing of S1601, when it is determined that there is no change in the jackpot or the out-of-range super reach (S1601: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation which is the variation pattern of the jackpot or the out-of-range super-reach is held (S1601: Yes), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is set to the variable N (S1602). It is determined whether or not the value of the prefetch number counter stored in the prefetch number counter storage area 223g is greater than 0 (S1603). When it is determined that the value of the prefetch counter is greater than 0 (S1603: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the prefetch count counter is 0 (S1603: No), it is determined whether the jackpot determination flag 223e is off. When it is determined that the jackpot determination flag 223e is off (S1604: Yes), the prefetch effect lottery table 1 (see FIG. 7C) is set as a lottery table (S1605). On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot determination flag 223e is ON (S1604: No), the prefetch effect lottery table 2 (see FIG. 7D) is set as the lottery table (S1606).

  The lottery result is acquired based on the prefetching effect lottery table set in the process of S1605 or S1606 and the value of N (the number of reserved balls) set in S1602 (S1607). Specifically, for example, if the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is "3" and the prefetch effect lottery table 1 (see FIG. 7C) is selected, the effect counter 223h A value is acquired, and if the value is any of 0 to 69, it is determined that there is no prefetch effect, and if it is any of 70 to 99, it is determined that there is prefetch effect.

  It is determined whether or not the lottery result acquired in S1607 is prefetch effect (S1608). When it is determined that there is no prefetch effect (S1608: No), the prefetch effect counter is initialized (set to 0) and set in the prefetch effect counter storage area 223f, and the prefetch number counter is initialized (set to 0). Setting) and setting it in the prefetch frequency counter storage area 223g (S1609).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1608, when it is determined that the lottery result is the pre-reading effect (S1608: Yes), the pre-reading effect flag indicating the pre-reading effect is set to ON, and the value of the pre-reading effect counter is initialized. It is set (set to 0) and stored in the prefetch effect counter storage area 223f (S1610). Based on the value of N (the value of the special reserved ball number counter 223b) and the effect counter 223h from the prefetch number lottery table 222b (see FIG. 8A), the prefetch number is determined and stored in the prefetch effect number storage area 223g. Yes (S1611). The determination of the number of prefetches will be specifically described. For example, when the value of N (the value of the special reserved ball number counter) is “3”, the prefetch number lottery table 222b (see FIG. 8A) is used for rendering. If the value of the counter 223h is 0 to 29, the prefetching number "1" is acquired, and if the value of the effect counter 223h is 30 to 59, the prefetching number "2" is acquired and the effect. If the value of the counter 223h is any of 60 to 99, the prefetch count “3” is acquired.

  It is determined whether or not the variation corresponding to the final number of prefetches acquired in S1611 is a jackpot or out-of-range variation of superreach (S1612). This determination is made based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a corresponding to the last number. When it is determined that the variation of the last number of prefetches is the variation pattern of the jackpot or the out-of-range super reach (S1612: Yes), this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation of the final number of times is a variation other than the jackpot or the out-of-range super reach (S1612: No), the final variation of the look-ahead effect is a variation of the jackpot or out-of-range super reach. The number of times is set (S1613).

  In this way, the number of look-ahead effects is determined by lottery, but the last change is always set to be a big hit or miss super-reach change. Even if the display is displayed, it is possible to prevent a problem in which the effect that the player has a greater expectation for the jackpot than the normal time is not displayed. Therefore, the player can have a greater expectation for the jackpot when the notice display of the look-ahead effect is displayed, and can play the game with the expectation that the look-ahead effect will not be performed. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1312). This variable display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1701). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1701: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and therefore the processing of S1706 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1702), and then in the processing of S1404 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 27), the fluctuation pattern The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1703).

  Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1704). In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

  In the process of S1706, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1706). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1706: No), it means that the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110. The setting process ends and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1707), and then in the process of S1407 of the command determination process (see FIG. 27), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1708).

  In the process of S1709, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1709), and the process proceeds to S1710. Here, the stop type corresponding to the correct stop type (complete loss, front/back deviation reach, big hit (big hit A, big hit B), etc.) is notified to the display control device 114.

  In the process of S1710, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1710). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The stop display of the variable effect is controlled.

<Control Processing Executed by MPU 231 of Display Control Device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 43. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the display control device 114 is powered on from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the main processing.

  If all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address designated by the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR type ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 in the boot program after the system reset is released, so that the NOR type ROM operates at high speed. Since the memory is a data readable memory, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” within a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, the MPU 231 can activate the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S1801), and various display controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. To start.

  Here, the boot process (S1801) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S1801) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the fixed value data are not stored in the dedicated program ROM provided by the conventional game machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided to store the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a low read speed particularly when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in the present boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring and storing to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c, Of the control programs stored in the 2 program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S1901). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the leading address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1902). As a result, the MPU 231 starts execution of the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1901.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1902, the MPU 231 can execute various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S1902, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a in accordance with the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and the fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs that are being stored are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S1903). Specifically, the control program and a part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are data tables. It is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing required for the boot processing (S1904), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S1801 in FIG. 31). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 31) (S1905), the execution of the boot program ends, and the boot process ends.

  By executing the boot process (S1801) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot processing, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 loads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed by using.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the work storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and the fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 32, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 is a boot program that executes the boot process that should be processed subsequent to the process of S1902. May be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, by this, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is designated by the instruction pointer. Alternatively, the processing set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S1903 to S1905 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the processing of S1901 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, by this, the top of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount and subsequently setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S1901. Alternatively, the processes of S1903 to S1905 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the process of S1902 and S1902.

  As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in the one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S1903 to S1905 without performing the processes of S1901 and S1902. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, next, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1802). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings such as the register group in the MPU 231 and the I/O device are performed. In addition, processing such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, the work RAM 233 is provided with various flags, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “OFF” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected by checking whether the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S1803). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the power-on main image area 235a is included, and the image controller 237 follows the transfer instruction so that the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image of the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 sends a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. Note that when the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, it transfers transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the internal memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby recognizing that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S1803, the power-on fluctuation image is then generated. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the above is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1804). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , The start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller 237, in accordance with this transfer instruction, causes the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234. When the power is turned on, it is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S1804, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. Is turned on (S1805). Accordingly, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 41A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 41A).

  Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. Accordingly, during that time, the simple command determination processing is performed so that the power-on image (not shown) (main power-on image or power-on variation image) is drawn in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 33B). (See S2108 of FIG. 33B) and simple display setting processing (see S2109 of FIG. 33B) are executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to its slow reading speed, It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or a person related to the hall, when the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped.

  Further, also in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to immediately check that the operation check efficiency is not deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

  Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on main image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third pattern. When the player starts the game while the display device 81 is displaying, there is a ball (start prize) in the first ball entrance 64, and the main controller 110 issues a voice lamp control to start the variation effect. When it is through the device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image can be immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234. Since it is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data, so that the main image continues to be displayed at power-on time after power-on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power-on, immediately after power-on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after that, even when the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S1805, the interrupt permission is set (S1806), and thereafter, the main process executes the infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1806, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2001), and the process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 15) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 33B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2101: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so that it is not a power-on image (not shown) but a normal effect image. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2102) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2103) is executed.

  In the command determination processing (S2102), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing is analyzed, the processing according to the command is executed, and the display demo command and When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. Particularly, in the main controller 110, when the start of the variation effect is determined, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the variation effect selected by the main controller 110 and the voice lamp controller 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 34 to 37.

  In the display setting process (S2103), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2102) or the like. Specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing situation and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40.

  After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2104). In this task processing, the image is constructed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 set by the display setting processing (S2103) or the simple display setting processing (S2109). The type of sprite (display object) is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2105). In this transfer setting process (S2105), while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 with respect to the image controller 237. Set the transfer instruction to transfer. The details of the transfer setting process (S2105) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S2106). In this drawing process, from the types of various sprites that form one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S2104), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105). The drawing list shown in FIG. 15 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2101, when it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S2101: Yes), it means that transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2108) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S2109) is executed, and the process proceeds to S2104.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 37, details of the above-described command determination processing (S2102), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 34, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2201), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2201: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2202), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S2203).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2204), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2204: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2205), the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2205) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing (S2205) is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing (S2205), first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table buffer 233d is set (S2301).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made in the main control device 110 for several seconds or more, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command judgment processing is executed. It is not possible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area when executing, but some commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2301, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation that is actually longer than the set display data table is set. Even if the time-varying fluctuating effect is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is finished, the main control device 110 displays the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuations in the design.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2302). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variable display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variable display data table set by the process of S2301 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2303). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2303, it is possible to easily determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2301, time data representing the variation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2304), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S2305). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S2306).

  After that, the variation pattern command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing. By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2305 is updated, while the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301 is updated. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S2302. The transfer data information defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in step S3, and the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 and the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a.

  In the display setting process, the time counter 233h for which the time data is set in the process of S2304 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2204, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2204: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2206). If there is a display variation type command (S2206: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2207), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, details of the stop type command processing (S2207) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (either big hit A, big hit B, out-of-front/rear reach, reach other than out-of-front/outside reach, or completely off) indicated by the display stop-type command is determined. (S2401), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B) is executed, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol after the fluctuating effect is finally set (S2402).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S2403).

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for identifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2105), after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is identified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2403, and the identified stop The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness of drawing in the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  It should be noted that the main controller 110 always makes a determination of the start of the fluctuation at a time of several seconds or more, so that it does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is not possible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command erroneously stops display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S2401, in the case where it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set by the process of S2402.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the "special symbol" is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the "special symbol is out". The stop symbol corresponding to "the jackpot" is displayed, and the player may confuse the pachinko machine 10 with "a special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement is set, and in reality, if the "special symbol big hit", the complete disengagement stop on the third symbol display device 81. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, which can please the player.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S2206, when it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2206: No), it is determined whether the display prefetch command is received (S2208). When it is determined that the display prefetch command is received (S2208: Yes), the display prefetch command process is executed (S2209) and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the display prefetch command processing (S2209) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this display prefetch command processing (S2209).

  In the display prefetch command process (S2209), first, the notice data table corresponding to the received display prefetch command is determined and set in the notice data table buffer (S2501). Here, the display prefetch command is set so that the effect content of the prefetch effect and the number of prefetches can be identified. Therefore, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 selects the notice data table corresponding to the number of pre-reading effects indicated by the display pre-reading command and the effect contents. For example, if the display pre-reading command is the first pre-reading effect number of times and is “90h11h” indicating the effect 1, the notice data table 1 of the effect 1 is selected.

  An advance notice transfer data table corresponding to the advance notice data table set in the process of S2501 is determined and set in the advance notice transfer data table buffer set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502). Note that the advance notice transfer data table has the same configuration as the display data table shown in FIG. 14, so its illustration and description will be omitted.

  Based on the notice data table set in the process of S2501, the time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S2503), and the pointer is initialized (S2504).

  Returning to FIG. 34, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2208, when it is determined that the display prefetch command has not been received (S2208: No), it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2210), and an error occurs. If there is a command (S2210: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2211) and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, details of the error command processing (S2211) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing error command processing. The error command process (S2211) is for executing a process corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the error command process (FIG. 37, S2211), first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2901). Then, of the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are turned off (S2902), and the error command The process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2901, the error type generated is judged from the error determination flag set by the process of S2902, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the processing of S2902, the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person involved in the hall can correctly understand the error occurrence status.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When it is determined in the process of S2210 that there is no error command (S2210: No), the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2212), and the process returns to S2201.

  In the processing of S2201 which is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes). ), and each processing of S2202-S2212 is performed again. Then, the processes of S2201 to S2212 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2201 that there are no unprocessed new commands, this command determination The process ends.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B), the simple command determination process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, only the commands necessary for displaying the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are displayed. Extraction and execution of fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 35(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 35(b)), which are processing corresponding to the respective commands, and other commands The process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 35A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on becomes the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2301. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, a process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing its contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40, details of the above-described display setting process (S2103) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 38, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3001), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3001: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, the processes of S3002 to S3004 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the new command flag is set to off (S3002), and then S3003 to S3004. The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process of.

  In the process of S3003, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S3004).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3101).

  In task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various parameters required.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 38. After the warning image setting process (S3004) or in the process of S3003, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3005.

  In S3005, pointer update processing is executed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

  In this pointer update processing (FIG. 40, S3005), first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3201). That is, in principle, the updating process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 while being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process, so that the value is updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S3201, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S2802). As a result, if it is End information (S3202: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f is updated past the address at which the actual data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demonstration display data table (S3203), and if it is the demonstration display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3205), and this processing ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2803, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( (S3206), the present process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is written. Since the drawing content of is constantly expanded, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S3202: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 38, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task process, the type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering contents developed in the process of S3006 together with the warning image previously developed, and the display coordinates are set for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3007), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). When the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3008: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S3009).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S3009: Yes), the finalized display effect is not yet produced, and it is the time to perform the finalized display effect. First, the finalized display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The data is set (S3010), and then the Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3011). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time in the confirmed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is further initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after setting the fixed display flag indicating that the fixed display effect is being turned on in the ON state (S3014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3015), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As described above, the drawing content can be set. In addition, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the fixed display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not heavily loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation effect performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating effect is changed according to the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect that was performed immediately before, and in the fluctuating display data table, fluctuation based on the data table From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S2104), the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S3015 until a predetermined time elapses after the variation is started, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3009, if the confirmed display flag is OFF instead of ON (S3009: No), it is determined whether the demo display flag is ON (S3016). If the demo display flag is off (S3016: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less due to the end of the fixed display effect, so the demo display data table is changed to the display data table. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S3017) and then writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3018). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demo display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), the demo display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3021), the present process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect ends, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set in the.

  In the process of S3016, if the demo display flag is ON (S3017: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is ended as it is. Then, the procedure returns to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is performed in the simple display setting processing (S2109) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 33B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the production time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image is finished, the image of the power-on variation image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2105), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 41A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S3301: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3302), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3301, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3302), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction of image data that has not been transferred is issued to the image controller 237 (S3401), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3402). In the process of S3402, when a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237 after the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. If it is determined by the processing in S3402 that the transfer processing is not completed (S3402: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to S3403. Further, as a result of the processing of S3301, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the processing proceeds to S3403.

  In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S3403), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3403: No), it is not A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then, during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S3403, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 33B), the command determination process (see FIGS. 34 to 37) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 38 to 40) are performed instead of the simple command determination process and the simple display setting process. (See), the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the image at the normal time is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed on the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 42) (see S3301: No in FIG. 41A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is retained without being overwritten during power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process becomes resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently-displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the voice lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timing are performed. The responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the normal image transfer setting process (S3303) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

  In this normal image transfer setting process (FIG. 42, S3303), first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer update process (S3005) of the display setting process (S2103) executed first is executed. The information described in the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is acquired (S3501). Here, the information indicated by the pointers of the transfer data table of the display data table and the advance notice transfer data table of the advance notice data table are respectively acquired. Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3502), and if it is transfer data information (S3502: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information. Of the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3503, the transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state, is set to ON (S3504), and the process proceeds to step S3505.

  In the process of S3502, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3502: No), the processes of S3503 and S3504 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3505. In the process of S3505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

  In the process of S3406, after the transfer instruction of the image data is set to the image controller 237, and when a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the processing of S3506 that the transfer processing is not completed (S3506: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed by the image controller 237, and thus the normal image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to S3507. Further, as a result of the processing in S3505, even if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3505: No), the process proceeds to S3507.

In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507). If the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3508),
In the process of S3517, it is determined whether the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517). The determination in the process of S3517 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S3517 (S3517: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent wasteful transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3517, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3517: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3418). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The sub address provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Transfer to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing of S3518, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S3519), and this normal transfer setting processing is ended. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the sub storage of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  Next, it is determined whether the back image change flag is on (S3513). If the rear image change flag is not on but on (S3513: No), there is no image data to start transfer, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3513: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is turned off (S3514), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3515). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal The head address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3516), and the process proceeds to S3517.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is the back image A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore, the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S3515, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back face A, the normal image transfer process is ended as it is.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. When the display data table is set to, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to cause the image controller 237 to follow the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d should be surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. You can

  Here, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, details of the above-described drawing process (S2106) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S2105) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the drawing list shown in FIG. 15 is generated (S3601). That is, in the process of S3601, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites that form one frame determined in the task process (S2105). Then, the parameters required for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of sprites to be arranged from the rearmost side in the image for one frame to the front side, and the sprite order after the rearrangement is detailed for each sprite. As the detailed drawing information (detailed information), the drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the start address of the character ROM 234 (transfer source start address) where the transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  It should be noted that in the present embodiment, the notice display mode of the prefetching effect is set such that the display order is the frontmost, as shown in FIG. Therefore, the display mode of the pre-reading notice is displayed at such a timing as to span the respective fluctuations (for example, fluctuation 1 and fluctuation 2) as shown in FIGS. 13(a) and 13(b), thereby stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol. It can be hidden to make it difficult for the player to understand. Therefore, it is possible to make the player see as if the fluctuation of the jackpot executed in the final round of the look-ahead effect or the out-of-range super-reach is performed in one fluctuation.

  In the present embodiment, the notice display mode of the look-ahead effect is set at the end of the drawing list (see FIG. 15) in order to display it in the foreground (front side of the special symbol (third symbol)). However, not limited to this, when the data set in the notice data table is transferred, other display data may not be set in the drawing list. With such a configuration, when the preview display mode of the prefetching effect is set, it is not necessary to perform the process of setting other display information in the drawing list. Therefore, the control load of the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is set. Can be reduced.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3502). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information Includes information for instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the beginning of the drawing list, and develops the images by overwriting them in the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  If the drawing list includes transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are calculated from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in the unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be simultaneously processed in parallel. You can

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3602, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S3603). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and setting it to "0" when it is "1". Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 33B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of 1 frame are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image of 1 frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of 1 frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, a frame buffer that develops an image for one frame and a frame buffer that reads out image information for one frame are replaced by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, the display processing of the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

  The look-ahead notice display mode is longer (or the same period) than the low-speed variable display period displayed for about 3 seconds when the variable display of the special symbol (third symbol) is started, and the third period It is displayed so as to hide the design (without displaying the third design). As a result, since the display of the third symbol at high speed can be continuously shown, it is possible to make continuous fluctuations of a plurality of lottery games like fluctuations of one lottery game.

  Further, as shown in the detailed view of the notice 1 of FIG. 13(a), the fluctuation of the special symbol (third symbol) is displayed at a low speed for a certain period from the start of the fluctuation (dynamic display), After the display is changed at high speed, the display is changed again at low speed. The pre-reading notice display mode is the fluctuation period of the special symbol at the low speed displayed after the high speed fluctuation among the two variable displays of the continuous lottery game and the fluctuation at the low speed of the special symbol at the start of the fluctuation of the next lottery game. It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over the period. Therefore, it is possible to make the display of high-speed fluctuations appear to continue over continuous fluctuations, and it is possible to make it look like one fluctuation.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the specific notice display of the look-ahead effect has a fixed display time, but the display time is not limited to this, and the display time may be changed depending on the lottery or the display content. Further, in addition to the one displayed over the variation, it may be configured to be displayed only during the variation of one special symbol.

<About the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 54. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first embodiment, the case where the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes the prefetching and performs the prefetching effect over a plurality of variations based on the result of the prefetching has been described.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the variation pattern of the SW (switch) effect that executes the specific notice effect is set in advance in the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is set in advance. When the frame button 22 is pressed at the timing, the specific notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the specific notice effect is configured in the notice display mode for notifying the player of the number of notice displays as in the look-ahead effect of the first embodiment. The same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of main controller 110 in the second embodiment>
The electrical configuration of main controller 110 in the second embodiment is the same as the electrical configuration of main controller 110 in the first embodiment, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment is different from the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment in that the look-ahead effect lottery table 222a of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is used. The read-ahead number lottery table 222b, the read-ahead effect selection table 222c, and the effect content command selection table 222d are deleted, and the notice number selection table 222e, the SW (switch) scenario table 223f, and the effect selection table 222g are added.

The advance notice number selection table 222e is a data table for determining the specific advance notice number shown in FIG. Specifically, the SW received in the process of S1412 of the notice effect selection process (FIG. 54, S1420), which is one of the processes in the command determination process 2 (FIG. 53, S1420) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The number of notices set in the variation pattern is selected on the basis of the variation pattern of the effect (in the notice number selection table, the special figure variations 1 to 5 are simply displayed).

  As shown in FIG. 45(b), the SW scenario table 222f is set next time each time the valid time processed by pressing the variation pattern frame button 22 of the selected SW effect elapses. It is a data table in which the effective time of the frame button 22 and the number of presses of the frame button 22 are set.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 47(a) to (c) and FIGS. 48(a) to (b), the SW effective time is predetermined in the variation pattern of each SW effect. This period is set in the SW scenario table 222f. It is set for each variation pattern of the SW effect, and when the effective time elapses, the next effective time and the number of presses are set by referring to the SW scenario table 222f. It is set to be the same as the selected number of notices, and when the number of presentations is set, END data indicating the end of the next data is set. This SW scenario table 222f is executed based on that the SW effective time counter 223j is 0 in the processing of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (FIG. 52, S1307) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Referenced in the process of S1324.

  The effect selection table 222g is a data table for determining the background color of the specific notice effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIGS. 46(a) and (b). The effect selection table 222g includes an effect selection table 1 and an effect selection table 2. The effect selection table 1 and the effect selection table 2 are configured such that the effect selection table 2 is more likely to select a background color of yellow, green, or red than the effect selection table 1.

  This effect selection table 222g indicates that when the frame button 22 is pressed within the effective time in the process of S1334 of the frame button input monitoring/effect process (FIG. 52, S1307) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, When the remaining time is 1.5 seconds or less, the effect selection table 1 (see FIG. 46(a)) is selected, and when the remaining effective time is longer than 1.5 seconds, the effect selection table 2 is selected. To be done.

  Therefore, the type of the effect selection table 222g to be selected can be changed by the difference in the timing when the player presses the frame button 22 (early timing or late timing), so that the same variation pattern of the SW effect is selected. Even in this case, different notice effects can be displayed. Therefore, the notice effect displayed to the player has a certain pattern, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

  In this embodiment, in the effect selection table 1 (see FIG. 46(a)) and the effect selection table 2 (see FIG. 46(b)), the background pattern is previously applied to the variation pattern of the selected SW effect. However, not limited to this, the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) while the remaining valid time of the frame button 22 is longer than a predetermined time, that is, after the frame button 22 becomes valid. When pressed at an early timing, based on the result of the determination of the special symbol, if the result of the determination is a hit, it is easy to select a red or green background color, and if the result of the determination is incorrect, it is blue. The background color of yellow or yellow may be set so as to be easily selected. Specifically, in the effect selection table 2 (see FIG. 46(b)), a large number of effects with red or green background colors are set in the variation pattern for which the hit/miss determination result is a hit, and blue is included in the outlying variation pattern. This can be achieved by setting so that an effect with a yellow background color is easily selected (may be the same as the effect selection table 1).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect selection table 222g has a configuration in which the background color is set in advance corresponding to the variation pattern and the value of the advance notice counter 223i, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed Alternatively, the counter value may be acquired based on, and the effect pattern of the background color may be selected based on the counter value. At this time, a plurality of selection tables may be set in which the counter values are assigned in correspondence with the advance notice counter 223i, and the tables may be selected depending on whether or not it is judged and when the frame button 22 is pressed. In such a case, it is configured such that the red or green background color is more easily selected when the timing of pressing the frame button 22 is earlier due to a hit/miss determination, and the frame button 22 is pressed in the SW effect with good timing. By doing so, the player can see the effect based on the winning/disapproval judgment earlier, and the motivation for the game can be increased.

  Returning to FIG. 44, the description will be continued. In the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, the winning information storage area 223a, the big hit determination flag 223e, the prefetching effect counter storage area 223f, and the prefetching effect number storage area 223g are different from those of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment. The effect counter 223h is deleted, and a notice counter 223i, a SW (switch) effective time counter 223j, and a SW (switch) pressing number counter 223k are added.

  The advance notice counter 223i is a counter for counting the number of times of the specific advance notice display in the variation pattern of the SW effect. As the display of the specific notice display, as in the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C, characters indicating the number of notice displays are displayed in the background color selected from the effect selection table 222g. .

  The advance notice counter 223i is updated by adding one by one in the process of S1336 of the frame button input monitoring/effect process (FIG. 52, S1307) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The advance notice counter 223i is initialized to 0 which is an initial value when the advance notice number is selected from the advance notice number selection table 222e.

  The SW effective time counter 223j is a counter for measuring the effective time of the frame button 22. The SW effective time counter 223j is set with a period of the SW effective time preset based on the variation pattern of the SW effect set in the SW scenario table 222f. When the valid time has elapsed, the next valid time is set based on the SW scenario table 222f.

  The SW pressing number counter 223k is a counter that counts the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed within the SW effective time. In the present embodiment, the SW press count set in the SW scenario table 222f is set in the SW press count counter 223k, and when the SW is pressed within the valid time, the count is subtracted (see S1331 in FIG. 52).

  In the present embodiment, the number of times of pressing the SW set in the SW scenario table 222f is set to "1". Therefore, when the SW is pressed once, the value of the SW pressing number counter 223k becomes 0, and the advance notice command for display is set. . Here, if the number of times of pressing the SW is set to a plurality of times such as 5 times in the SW scenario table 222f, if the frame button 22 is not pressed a plurality of times set within the effective time, the advance notice command for display is set. Instead, the specific notice display may not be displayed. Therefore, if the number of times the SW is pressed in the SW scenario table 222f is set to various values, it is possible to make the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed until the notice display is displayed differently each time, and the player has a fresh effect. Can be provided.

  Furthermore, by making the number of presses set in the SW scenario table different based on the judgment result of the variation pattern selected, the player can expect a big hit by the number of presses until the notice display is displayed. Can be made. Specifically, it can be realized by configuring so that a relatively large number of presses is set when the hit/miss judgment result is a hit, and a relatively small number of presses is set when the result is wrong. In addition, by configuring so that a large number of presses can be set with a low probability even in the case of a miss, a large number of presses can be set even if the hit/miss judgment result is missed, so there is an expectation for a jackpot. Can be played. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 according to the second embodiment>
The notice data table of the display control device 114 in the second embodiment is replaced with the notice data table of the first embodiment (see FIGS. 11A to 11C), and FIGS. The notice data tables 1 to 4 shown in 50 are set. This is mainly due to the increase in the types of background colors, and since there is no change in the detailed configuration and the like from the first embodiment, a detailed description will be omitted. Other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Main Controller 110 in Second Embodiment>
The control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment is one process in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16) in contrast to the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. The start winning process (FIG. 19, S105) is changed to the starting winning process 2 (FIG. 51, S120).

  The start winning processing 2 (S120) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing the starting winning process 2 (S120). In the start winning process 2 (FIG. 51, S120) in the second embodiment, the respective processes of S407 to S411 are deleted from the starting winning process (FIG. 19, S105) in the first embodiment. Since each processing from S401 to S406 is the same as each processing from S401 to S406 in the first embodiment, detailed description will be omitted.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Second Embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 52, the frame button input monitoring/production process (S1307) which is one process in the main process (FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring/effect process (S1307). In the frame button input monitoring/production process (S1307) in the first embodiment, only the input monitoring control of the frame button 22 similar to that in the conventional technique is performed, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted. In the frame button input monitoring/effect process (FIG. 52, S1307) in the second embodiment, when the SW effect variation pattern is selected, the SW valid time (from the SW scenario table 222f (see FIG. 45(b))) is selected. (SW effective period) is set, it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) within the effective time, and when it is pressed, the process of setting the corresponding display advance notice command is executed. This is different from the first embodiment.

  In the frame button input monitoring/effect process (FIG. 52, S1307), first, it is determined whether the value of the SW valid time counter 223j is 0 (S1321). When it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223j is 0 (S1321: Yes), the SW pressing number counter 223k is set to 0 which is an initial value (S1322). The SW scenario counter is incremented by 1 (S1323). The SW scenario counter is a counter value set in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the counter value is incremented by 1 from 0 as the initial value. Is added. Note that this SW scenario counter is set to an initial value of 0 based on the determination that the SW effect variation pattern command has been received in the process of S1424 of the notice effect selection process (FIG. 54, S1420) described later. To be done.

  The SW scenario is acquired based on the variation pattern and the SW scenario counter received from the SW scenario table 222f (see FIG. 45(b)) (S1324). Specifically, when the change pattern of the SW effect is received and the SW effect is executed, the SW scenario counter is set to 1 which is the initial value, 1 is added in the process of S1323, and the SW scenario counter The value is 2. For example, if the variation pattern of the received SW effect is the special figure variation 2, it is determined from the SW scenario table 222f shown in FIG. The SW scenario of special figure variation 2 corresponding to 2 (valid time 3 seconds, number of times SW is pressed) is selected. Here, the set valid time is a detailed valid period, and a detailed period of 3 seconds, which is 5 seconds to 8 seconds in the variation time of the special symbol, is set. In the special figure variation 2, the specific notice effect is executed twice.

  In the process of S1325, it is determined whether the SW scenario acquired in the process of S1324 is END data (S1325). When it is determined that the SW scenario acquired in the process of S1324 is END data (S1325: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW scenario is not the END data (S1326: No), the SW valid time and the number of times of pressing the SW are acquired from the SW scenario. Although the SW valid time acquired here is described above, the SW valid period in which the depression of the frame button 22 is set to be valid next is set in the variation time of the variation pattern of the SW effect.

  The SW valid time counter 223j is set with the period during which the next frame button 22 acquired in the process of S1326 is valid (S1327). The SW press count acquired in the process of S1326 is set in the SW press count counter 223k (S1328).

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1321, when it is determined that the SW valid time counter 223j is larger than 0 (S1321: No), the SW valid time counter 223j is decremented by 1 (S1329). Next, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1330). In the process of S1330, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1330: Yes), the value of the SW pressing number counter 223k is decremented by 1 (S1331). It is determined whether the SW pressing number counter 223k is a value larger than 0 (S1332). Here, by performing the determination of the SW pressing number counter 223k, in the present embodiment, the pressing number set in the SW scenario table is all set to 1, but the number of pressings is set to 3 times, 5 times, or the like. If this is set, until the value of the SW press count counter 223k becomes 0 in the process of S1332, the process when the switch is pressed is not executed, and the SW effect is specified by pressing the game button 22 multiple times. It can be configured to display a notice display.

  When it is determined in the process of S1332 that the SW pressing number counter 223k is larger than 0 (S1332: Yes), it is determined whether the remaining valid time of the SW valid time counter 223j is 1.5 seconds or less. (S1333). When it is determined that the remaining effective time of the SW effective time counter 223j is 1.5 seconds or less (S1333: Yes), the effect selection table 1 (see FIG. 46A) is set (S1334). On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining effective time of the SW effective time counter 223j is longer than 1.5 seconds (S1333: No), the effect selection table 2 (see FIG. 46(b)) is set (S1335). ).

  As a result, after the SW effective time is set and the pressing of the frame button 22 is set to be determined to be effective, the frame button 22 is pressed at an early timing (elapse of early time) (that is, the remaining time of the effective time). Is selected) and the effect selection table 2 (see FIG. 46(b)) is selected, so that the effect 3, which is a red background color, can be easily selected. Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed at a late timing (that is, the remaining effective time is short), the effect selection table 1 is selected, so that it is difficult to select the effect 3 which is the red background color. Therefore, the selected effect can be changed depending on the timing of pressing the game button 22, and various effects can be provided to the player.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, only the timing of pressing the frame button 22 is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if the determination result of the variation pattern is hit when the frame button 22 is pressed at an early timing, the red effect 3 is selected. Set easily. On the other hand, if the timing at which the game button 22 is pressed is late, even if the result of determination of whether or not the variation pattern is a big hit, it will be more difficult to select than if the red background color is pressed earlier. If the result of the winning/disapproval judgment is incorrect, the red background color is more easily selected when pressed earlier, but the red background color is easier to select when pressed faster than when the jackpot is hit. Set it so that the background color is not easily selected. With this configuration, the player can quickly obtain advantageous information by pressing the frame button 22 early (before the special symbol fluctuates and stops), and predict the win/fail judgment result to some extent. And you can enjoy the game. Therefore, the expectation for the jackpot can be greatly held in the specific notice display mode, and the player's motivation for the game can be increased.

  The description of FIG. 52 will be continued. The notice counter 223i is incremented by 1 and updated, and the background color is selected from the effect selection table 222g selected in S1334 or S1335 based on the value of the notice counter 223i (S1336). A display advance notice command is set based on the background color selected in the process of S1336 and the value of the advance notice counter 223i (S1337). The display advance notice command is generated by a command capable of identifying how many times the background color is in the specific advance notice display. Based on this display advance notice command, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 selects from the advance notice data tables shown in FIGS. 49(a) to (c) and FIG. Select a table. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1330 that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1330: No), the value of the SW valid time counter 223j is decremented by 1 (S1337).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the command determination processing 2 (S2020) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 2 (S2020). The respective processes of S1401 to S1402, S1404 to S1409, S1415 in the command determination process 2 (FIG. 53, S2020) in the second embodiment are the same as S1401 to S1402, S1404 in the command determination process (FIG. 27, S1312) in the first embodiment. The same processing as each processing of S1409 and S1415 is executed. Detailed description of the same processing will be omitted.

  In command determination processing 2 (FIG. 53, S2020), first, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command is received from main controller 110 (S1401). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is set to ON (S1402), and the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S1404). It is determined whether the variation pattern extracted in the process of S1404 is a variation pattern in which the SW effect is executed (S1419).

  Here, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern in which the SW effect is executed is set to a variation pattern in which the hit/miss determination result is a big hit and a variation pattern in which the result is out of reach. With such a configuration, when the specific notice display mode of the SW effect is displayed, it is always a jackpot or a missed super-reach, and the specific notice display mode makes the player expect the jackpot. be able to. Therefore, the player can play the game with the expectation that the specific notice display will not be executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In the processing of S1419, when it is determined that the variation pattern of the SW effect (S1419: Yes), the notice effect selecting process is executed (S1420). The details of the notice effect selection process (S1420) will be described later with reference to FIG. 54, but a process of setting the SW effective time for executing the SW effect and the number of times of pressing the SW is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the variation pattern of the SW effect (S1419: No), this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the notice effect selection process (S1420) which is one of the processes in the command determination process 2 (FIG. 53, S2020) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this advance notice effect selection processing (S1420).

  In the notice production selecting process (FIG. 54, S1420), first, the notice number is selected based on the type of the variation pattern received from the notice number selection table 222e (see FIG. 45A) (S1421). The SW scenario is acquired based on the variation pattern selected from the SW scenario table 222f (see FIG. 45A) and the SW scenario counter (S1423).

  The value of the SW scenario counter is initialized to 1 which is the initial value (S1424). The SW valid time and the number of times of pressing the SW are acquired from the SW scenario based on the SW scenario counter (S1425). Here, the acquired SW effective time is set to a period during which the game button 22 is first effective (first time) within the variable time. The effective time acquired in the process of S1425 is set in the SW effective time counter 223j. The SW press count acquired in the process of S1425 is set in the SW press count counter 223k (S1427).

  In the present embodiment, the variation pattern for performing the SW effect is set in advance, and when the variation pattern is selected, various settings of the SW effect are performed, but the invention is not limited to this. When a pattern command is received, it may be configured to execute a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the SW effect. In this case, this lottery may be performed for all the variation patterns, but by limiting the variation pattern to reach, for example, when SW production is always executed, reach production is performed. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the frame button 22 is used to display the specific notice display, and when the player does not press the frame button 22, the specific notice display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Do not show. In addition, even if the number of notices of the specific notice set in advance in the variation pattern is less than the number of notices of the specific notice set in advance due to the SW valid time that is not pressed by the player, the display according to the number of times is displayed. It is configured. Specifically, in the notice number selection table 222e (see FIG. 45(a)), the notice number corresponding to Toku-zu variation 4 is selected, and as shown in FIG. Even if the player is configured to be set, the player does not press the frame button 22 at the first and second SW effective times, but first presses the frame button 22 at the third effective SW effective time. However, the first display shown in FIG. 12A is displayed. When the frame button 22 is pressed again during the next SW valid time, the second display shown in FIG. 12B is displayed. Then, reach display such as super reach is started.

  Therefore, it is possible to produce an effect according to the operation of the player. Therefore, when the player does not need the special notice display, the game button 22 is not displayed unless the game button 22 is operated, and the player can play the game according to his or her preference.

  In the present embodiment, when the SW valid time is reached, characters, icons, characters or the like indicating that it is the SW valid time is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, voice, or the like, or a voice indicating that it is the SW valid time. Is output. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which an LED or the like is built in the frame button 22 or the like, and the frame button 22 itself is turned on when the SW valid time is reached to notify. With such a configuration, the player can be notified of the SW effective time in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the variation pattern of the SW effect, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the SW effective time and the display advance notice command is output, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 indicates the display advance notice command. Not only is the notice data table set, but the variation mode after the specific notice display is displayed is randomly selected from the remaining time and displayed (corresponding to the switching means). Specifically, before the frame button 22 is pressed by the SW effect, the special symbol is displayed at high speed on the background screen in the mountains, and after the specific notice is displayed, the special symbol is displayed on the riverside background screen. Change to a display that is changing rapidly. In this way, when the specific notice display is displayed, the contents of the effect on the third symbol display device 81 thereafter are also changed, so that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the background is changed after the frame button 22 is pressed in the SW effect and the specific notice is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the design of the design may be changed, A reach display mode may be adopted, or super-reach display may be started. It should be noted that this display may be performed by lottery based on the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 having received the display advance notice command.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 61. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the case has been described in which the SW effective time period is preset in the variation pattern of the SW effect. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, although the maximum number of specific notice displays (the number of SW effects) is set in the SW effect variation pattern, the period is not set. The difference is that the specific notice display is displayed up to the maximum number of times by the player's operation of the game button. The same elements as those in the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of main controller 110 in the third embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is the same as the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment>
In the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113MPU221 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the notice number selection table 222e, the SW scenario table 222f, and the effect selection table 222g are deleted from the second embodiment, and the notice number selection table is deleted. 2 (222h), SW scenario table 2 (222i), and effect selection table 3 (222j) are added.

  As shown in FIG. 56(a), the notice number selection table 2 (222h) shows the maximum number of specific notice displays for the variation pattern of the SW effect (here, it is simply shown by the special figure variations 1 to 5). It is a data table in which the number of notices is set. The difference is that the number of notices is changed to the maximum value from the notice number selection table 222e of the second embodiment. Since the other points are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

  In the SW scenario table 2 (222i), as shown in FIG. 56(b), the number of times of pressing the SW is set based on the variation pattern and the value of the SW scenario counter. This is different from the SW scenario table 222f (see FIG. 45B) in the second embodiment in that the SW valid time is not set. Since the other points are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the effect selection table 3 (222j) shows the time of effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the background color and the specific notice display when the specific notice display is selected are displayed. It is a data table for selecting. Based on the value of the notice counter 223i and the value of the effect counter (the same as that described in the first embodiment), each effect from effect 1 to effect 4 shown in FIG. 57 is selected. It should be noted that the effects 1 to 4 are for determining the background color of the specific notice display and the effect time after the specific notice display is displayed, as in the second embodiment. In the third embodiment, after the specific notice display for 3 seconds is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 of the display control device 81 is thirdly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the selected presentation time. The variation mode of the symbol is selected to perform the variation.

  Specifically, if the value of the notice counter 223i is 2 and the value of the effect counter is 15 in the effect selection table 3 shown in FIG. The command is set. The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 selects the advance notice data table 2 (see FIG. 49(b)) set in the yellow background color based on the advance notice command for display, and selects "second time" for 3 seconds. The specific notice display which is a character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a yellow background color. After that, as an effect for the set effect time of 4 seconds, a special symbol (third symbol) design is displayed by, for example, changing from a wooden box to a car by lottery. The character is displayed during the effect time, and the effect is continuously performed until the next display advance notice command is received. Further, the present embodiment is not limited to this, and by using this effect time, for example, a special special symbol (third symbol) exclusively for reach which is not normally displayed may be displayed, a character or the like. You may perform the specific effect in which is displayed. As a reach-only design, the same design is displayed on the left and right in normal times to notify the player of the reach, but the reach-only design selected at this production time is a larger design than usual. Only one reel is displayed, and a notification (for example, a character) that is a reach is displayed on the design.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to entertain the player by displaying a specific notice display that is a different effect from the normal time, and it is possible to enjoy the game without getting tired. Note that the frame button 22 is not effective during this effect time, and the player can show the effect at least during this effect time. Therefore, even if the player mistakenly presses the frame button 22 continuously, it is possible to suppress the problem that the effect is skipped and the next effect is displayed before the effect is viewed.

  In contrast to the effect selection table 1 (see FIG. 46A) and the effect selection table 2 (see FIG. 46B) of the second embodiment, the effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 57) of the present embodiment is The difference is that the background color is randomly selected without depending on the variation pattern.

  In the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, the SW effective time counter 223j is deleted from the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment, and the SW effect time counter 223m and reach are reached. The previous second counter 223n is added respectively. Since the other points are the same as those of the second embodiment, description thereof will be omitted.

  The SW effect time counter 223m is a counter for measuring the effect time after the specific notice display selected from the effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 57). The SW effect time counter 223m is decremented by 1 in the process of S1357 of the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (FIG. 58, S2610) described later. When it is determined that the SW effect time counter 223m is 0 (S1343: Yes in FIG. 58), if the number of seconds before reach is 10 seconds or more, the frame button 22 is set to be valid.

  As described above, the SW effect time counter 223m is also a counter value for counting the prohibition period for prohibiting the operation of the frame button 22 during the effect time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the frame button 22 from being pressed during the effect time and the effect being skipped.

  In the present embodiment, the SW effect time counter 223m is provided in order to display the effect to the player during the effect time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the next specific notice display is displayed according to the intention of the player. If it is configured to be able to do so, the SW effect time counter 223m may not be provided. By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to skip the effect at his/her will, and the effect can be efficiently shown to the player.

  The pre-reach second counter 223n is a counter for counting the time until the variation pattern of the selected SW effect becomes the reach and the reach display mode effect predetermined in the variation pattern is started. This pre-reach second counter 223n stores the pre-reach second number acquired in the process of S1434 of the notice effect selection process 2 (S1430 of FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 described later. In addition, the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (S2610 in FIG. 58) is decremented by 1 in the process of S1358. Further, it is determined whether the number of seconds before reach is a predetermined number of seconds or more (10 seconds in this embodiment) (see S1344), and if it is 10 seconds or more, the frame button 22 becomes effective. On the other hand, if it is less than 10 seconds, the specific notice display of the production 5 that is the notice display that develops into the reach production is selected. The pre-reach second counter 223n is set to 0 which is an initial value in an initial state such as when the power is turned on.

  As a result, when the number of seconds before reach becomes equal to or less than the predetermined number of seconds, it is possible to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an effect that informs the player that the reach effect is always started. Therefore, it is possible to accurately notify the player that the reach effect starts, and it is possible to prevent the player from missing the reach effect.

  Other electrical configurations of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment are the same as those in the second embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Third Embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 58, a frame button input monitoring/production process 2 (FIG. S2610) which is one process in the main process (FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described. ..

  In the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (FIG. 58, S2610), first, it is determined whether the value of the pre-reach second counter 223n is greater than 0 (S1341). When it is determined that the value of the pre-reach seconds counter 223n is larger than 0 (S1341: Yes), the pre-reach seconds counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S1342). On the other hand, if the pre-reach seconds counter is 0 or less, that is, if it is determined to be 0 (S1341: No), the process of S1343 is executed. In the process of S1343, it is determined whether the value of the SW effect time counter 223m is 0 (S1343). When it is determined that the value of the SW effect time counter 223m is 0 (S1343: Yes), it is determined whether the pre-reach second counter 223n is less than 10 seconds (S1344). When it is determined that the pre-reach second counter 223n is less than 10 seconds (S1344: Yes), the notice command for display of the effect 5 for notifying that the reach effect is performed is set (S1345). After that, the SW pressing number counter 223k is initialized to 0 which is an initial value (S1346), the SW scenario counter is initialized to 0 which is an initial value (S1347), and the pre-reach second counter 223n is initialized to 0 which is an initial value. (S1348).

  In this way, when the number of seconds before the reach is less than the predetermined number of seconds (less than 10 seconds in the present embodiment), the advance notice command for display of the effect 5, which is the advance notice for notifying that the reach effect is executed, is set. .. As the notice display content corresponding to the effect 5, a display mode in which the background rotates in a spiral shape at high speed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the time when the reach is started.

  In the present embodiment, the effect 5 is set as an effect for notifying that the reach effect is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a display indicating the number of specific notification displays may be displayed based on the value of the notification counter 223i. Good. With this configuration, it is possible to execute more specific notice display.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the pre-reach second counter 223n is 10 seconds or more (S1344: No), it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S1349). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S1349: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1349: Yes), the SW pressing number counter 223k is decremented by 1 and set. It is determined that the SW press count counter 223k is 0. When it is determined that the SW press count counter 223k is 0 (S1351: Yes), the effect lottery process is executed (S1352). The effect lottery process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 59, but the effect contents of the background color and the effect time are determined from the effect selection table 3, and the advance notice command for display is set based on the determined content. Processing is performed.

  The effect time selected in the process of S1651 of the effect lottery process (FIG. 59, S1352) is stored in the SW effect time counter (S1353). The SW scenario counter is incremented by 1 (S1354), and the next SW scenario is acquired from the SW scenario table 2 (see FIG. 56B) based on the variation pattern and the SW scenario counter (S1355). It is determined whether the SW scenario acquired in the process of S1355 is END information. When it is determined that the information is END information (S1356: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the END information (S1356: No), the SW press count is acquired from the SW scenario acquired in the process of S1355 (S1357). The SW pressing count acquired in the process of S1357 is set in the SW pressing count counter 233k (S1358). On the other hand, if it is determined that the SW effect press count counter is not 0 (S1351: No), this process ends.

  In the process of S1343, when it is determined that the value of the SW effect time counter 223m is not 0 (S1343: No), the value of the SW effect time counter is decremented by 1 (S1357), and the reach pre-second counter 223n is set. One is subtracted (S1358), and this processing ends.

  In the present embodiment, the pre-reach seconds are decremented by 1 and updated only when the SW effect time counter 223m is not 0. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 ( 58, S2610) may be configured to be updated every time it is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the effect lottery process (S1352) which is one process in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (FIG. 58, S2610) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. .. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the effect lottery process (S1352).

  In the effect lottery process (FIG. 59, S1352), first, the effect and effect time are selected from the effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 57) based on the values of the effect counter 223h and the notice counter 223i (S1651). A display advance notice command for notifying the display control device 114 of the effect and effect time selected in S1651 and the advance notice counter 223i is set (S1652).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the command determination processing 3 (S2030) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 3 (FIG. 60, S2030). The command determination process 3 (FIG. 60, S2030) in the third embodiment is different from the command determination process 2 (FIG. 53, S2020) in the second embodiment in that the notice production selection process (S1420) is the notice production selection process 2 ( It has been changed to S1430). The other processes are the same as those in the second embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of S1419, when it is determined that the extracted variation pattern is the variation pattern of the SW effect (S1419: Yes), the notice effect selection process 2 is executed (S1430).

  This notice effect selection process 2 (S1430) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the advance notice effect selection process 2 (S1430). In the notice production selection process 2 (FIG. 61, S1430), first, the maximum notice count is acquired from the notice count selection table 2 (see FIG. 56A) based on the variation pattern (S1431). Next, the advance notice counter 223i is initialized to 0 which is an initial value (S1432). The SW scenario is acquired from the SW scenario table 2 based on the values of the variation pattern and the SW scenario counter (S1433). The SW scenario is the number of times of pressing the SW or the END information shown in the SW scenario table 2 (see FIG. 56B) by the SW scenario counter (No. 1 to 7) and the variation pattern.

  The pre-reach second number is acquired from the advance notice number selection table 2 (see FIG. 56A) based on the variation pattern, and is set in the pre-reach second counter 223n (S1434). The SW scenario counter is set to an initial value of 1 (indicating No. 1) (S1435), the SW press count is acquired from the SW scenario acquired in the process of S1432 (S1436), and the SW press count counter 223k is set. The number of times of pressing the SW acquired in the process of S1435 is set (S1437).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, when the variation pattern of the SW effect is selected, the maximum number of the specific notice display (SW effect) is set. By pressing the frame button 22 during the time (excluding the presentation time), the specific notice display can be displayed. In the variation pattern of the SW effect, the notification mode for notifying that the frame button 22 is in the effective period is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as in the second embodiment. This allows the player to operate the frame button 22 in anticipation of how many times the specific notice display will be displayed, and expecting that the specific notice display will still be displayed. Further, after the specific notice display (3 seconds) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a predetermined effect (effect time effect selected in the effect selection table 3 (see FIG. 57)) is executed. This effect is selected from a plurality of effects preset in the display control device 114 in accordance with the effect time, so that there are various effects, and different effects are displayed each time the specific notice display is displayed. In addition, if this effect is adjusted to the effect time (for example, a character is displayed and the character talks for the effect time), the player can be notified that the effect time has elapsed. .. The player can operate the frame button 22 thinking that the specific notice display may be displayed again after the series of effects is completed. Therefore, the game operation of the player can be made easy to understand.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the case has been described in which the specific notice display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the player's operation by pressing the frame button 22. However, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the second embodiment is based on the number of times the player has pressed the frame button 22 to determine whether or not to display the specific notice display based on the number of times of history. It is different from the pachinko machine 10 in. The same elements as those in the third embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment is the same as the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment>
In the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, a SW holding number counter 223o and a SW history number counter 223p are added to the third embodiment.

  The SW holding number counter 223o is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed within the valid time (within the time when the pressing of the frame button 22 is determined to be valid). The SW holding number counter 223o is a counter that, when a variation pattern of the SW effect is received, counts the number of times the SW pattern is pressed within the valid time of the variation pattern. In the process of S1447 of the notice effect selection process 3 (FIG. 65, S1440) executed when the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command, the initial value is initialized to 0. In addition, in the process of S1381 of the frame button input monitoring/production process 3 (S2620 in FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, 1 is added based on the judgment that the frame button 22 is pressed. To be done. In the process of S1375 of the frame button input monitoring/effect process 3 (FIG. 63, S2620), the counted value is saved and stored in the SW history counter 223p described later. The SW holding number counter 223o is set to 0 which is an initial value in an initial state such as when the power is turned on.

  The SW history number counter 223p is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed within a valid period in one SW effect variation pattern. As described above, in the SW history counter, the value of the SW holding counter 223o is saved and stored in the process of S1375 of the frame button input monitoring/effect process 3 (FIG. 63, S2620). The number of presses is stored.

  In the variation pattern of the SW effect, when the frame button 22 is pressed within the effective period, the next SW scenario (see FIG. 56B), which is a setting for displaying the next specific notice display, is set. The value of the SW history counter is used when the lottery is performed. Although the details will be described later, when the value of the SW history number counter is not equal to or more than the predetermined number, the next SW scenario is set.

<Control Processing Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Fourth Embodiment>
With reference to FIG. 63, the frame button input monitoring/effect process 3 (S2620) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring/effect process 3 (S2620). The frame button input monitoring/production process 3 (S2620) in the fourth embodiment is a process executed instead of the frame button input monitoring/production process 2 (S2610 in FIG. 58) of the third embodiment.

  In the frame button input monitoring/effect process 3 (FIG. 63, S2620), first, it is determined whether the value of the pre-reach second counter 223n is greater than 0 (S1371). When it is determined that the value of the pre-reach seconds counter 223n is larger than 0 (S1371: Yes), the value of the pre-reach seconds counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S1372). On the other hand, if the value of the pre-reach second counter 223n is 0 or less, that is, if it is determined to be 0 (S1371: No), the process of S1373 is executed. In the process of S1373, it is determined whether the SW effect time counter 223m is 0 (S1373). When it is determined that the SW effect time counter 223m is 0 (S1373: Yes), it is determined whether the pre-reach second counter 223n is less than 3 seconds (S1374). When it is determined that the pre-reach second counter 223n is less than 3 seconds (S1374: Yes), the value of the SW holding number counter 223o is saved (stored) in the SW history number counter 223p (S1375). The SW pressing number counter 223k is initialized to 0 which is an initial value (S1376), the SW scenario counter is initialized to 1 which is an initial value (S1377), and the pre-reach second counter 223n is initialized to 0 which is an initial value. (S1378).

  In the process of S1374, when it is determined that the pre-reach second counter 223n is 3 seconds or more (S1374: No), it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S1379). When it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S1379: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1379: Yes), the SW pressing number counter 223k is decremented by 1 (S1380), and the SW holding number counter 223o is incremented by 1 (S1381). It is determined whether the SW press count counter 223k is 0 (S1382). If it is determined that the value of the SW press count counter 223k is not 0 (S1382: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW press count counter 223k is 0 (S1382: Yes), the effect lottery process is executed (S1352). This effect lottery process (FIG. 59, S1352) is the same process as that already described in the third embodiment, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  After the effect lottery process (FIG. 59, S1352) is executed, the effect time of the SW scenario is set in the SW effect time counter 223m (S1383). One is added to the SW scenario counter (S1384). The SW scenario is acquired from the SW scenario table 2 (see FIG. 56B) based on the variation pattern and the SW scenario counter (S1385). It is determined whether the SW scenario acquired in the process of S1385 is END information (S1386). When it is determined that the SW scenario is the END information (S1386: Yes), the processes of S1375 to S1378 are executed, and then the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1386, when it is determined that the SW scenario is not the END information (S1386: No), the value of the variable T is set to 0 (S1387). A value obtained by adding the value of the SW history counter 223p and the maximum number of notices in the notice number selection table to the variable T is acquired (S1388). Calculation of T/6 (lottery) is executed (S1389). It is determined whether the calculation result (lottery result) of S1389 is 1 or more (S1390). When it is determined that the calculation result is 1 or more (S1390: Yes), the SW press count is acquired from the SW scenario acquired in the process of S1385 (S1389). The number of pressings of the SW scenario is set in the SW pressing number counter 223k (S1390). On the other hand, in the process of S1390, when it is determined that the calculation result of S1389 is less than 1 (S1390: No), the processes of S1375 to S1378 are executed, and then this process is ended.

  In the process of S1373, if it is determined that the value of the SW effect time counter 223m is not 0 (S1373: No), the value of the SW effect time counter 223m is decremented by 1 (S1393).

  Thus, even if the data of the SW scenario selected from the SW scenario table 2 (see FIG. 56B) is not the END information, if the value of the SW history counter 223p is small, the next SW scenario is set. Based on this, the SW press count is not set in the SW press count counter 223k. Therefore, next time the frame button 22 is pressed, the specific notice display is not displayed. Next, since the next specific notice display is not displayed until the value of the SW history number counter 223p becomes equal to or larger than the predetermined value, even if the same maximum notice number is selected, the player who presses the frame button 22 a lot The number of times the particular notice display is displayed increases, and the number of times the particular notice display is displayed can be reduced for a player who does not press the frame button 22 too much, and the effect can be changed by the player. As a result, various effects can be executed for the player.

  Further, the maximum notice count and the value of the SW history count counter 223p are added and divided by "6" which is the maximum notice count of the notice count selection table 2 (see FIG. 56(a)). When the maximum number of notices in the notice number selection table 2 (see FIG. 56A) is selected, the calculation result is always 1 or more, and the specific notice display can be displayed up to the maximum number. Therefore, the specific notice display is not always displayed the maximum number of times even if the frame button 22 is pressed, and when the specific variation pattern is selected, the specific notice display is displayed regardless of the number of times of history. The player can be surprised.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the command determination processing 4 (S2040) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 4. In the command determination process 4 (FIG. 64, S2040) in the fourth embodiment, the notice production selection process 2 (FIG. 61, S1430) is the notice production compared to the command determination process 3 (FIG. 60, S1312) in the third embodiment. It is changed to the selection process 3 (FIG. 65, S1440). For other processing, the same processing as the command determination processing 3 (FIG. 60, S1312) in the third embodiment is executed, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the notice effect selection process 3 (S1440) which is one of the processes in the command determination process 4 (FIG. 64, S1440) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment. Will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the notice effect selecting process 3. In the notice effect selection process 3 (FIG. 65, S1440) in the fourth embodiment, the process of S1448 is added to the notice effect selection process 2 (FIG. 61, S1430) in the third embodiment. For each processing of S1441 to S1447 in the fourth embodiment, the same processing as each processing of S1431 to S1437 in the third embodiment is executed. Detailed description of the same processing will be omitted. In the process of S1447, when the number of presses acquired in the process of S1446 is set in the SW press count counter 223k (S1447), the process of S1448 is executed. In the process of S1448, the value of the SW holding counter 223o is initialized to "0" which is the initial value (S1448). Then, this process is completed.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the case where the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes prefetching and performs the prefetching effect over a plurality of variations based on the result of the prefetching has been described. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, with the opportunity to win a small hit different from the big hit, a variation pattern dedicated to after the small hit different from the normal time is selected for the held lottery game. Thus, it is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the variable display is executed a plurality of times as if it were one lottery game. The same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment>
In the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67(a), a big hit random number table 202a, a fluctuation pattern selection table 202b, a status selection table 202c, status information 202d, and a small hit dedicated fluctuation pattern selection. Each table 202e is set.

  The big hit random number table 202a sets the value of the first big random number counter C1 which is determined to be a big hit, a small hit, and a miss. In the present embodiment, the value of the first random number counter C1 is "7,107,282" in the normal probability game state (low probability game state) and "4,11,28,38," in the high probability game state. 45,52,64,78,83,99,106,112,122,134,140,151,168,176,183,197,207,218,222,231,249,256,263,270,285, If it is any of "299", it is set as a jackpot determination value determined to be a jackpot (the same as in the first embodiment). If the value of the first random number counter C1 is any of "0, 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 8, 9, 10, 12", a small hit determination value determined as a small hit. Is set as. It is to be noted that this small hit is set to be included in the one determined to be out in the hit determination, and is set as a kind of out. In the present embodiment, the small hit determination value is set from among the out-of-range judgment values, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the small hit may be set as one of the big hits and set from among the big hit determination values. Alternatively, the value may be set to be determined by the value of the first hit type counter C2, instead of the one determined to be a big hit.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the small win is won, the variable winning device 65 is opened twice for 0.5 seconds. For the gaming state after the small hit (low probability gaming state or high probability gaming state), the same gaming state as the gaming state before the small hit is set.

  The variation pattern selection table 202b is a selection table for determining a variation pattern (dynamic display mode) in which the first symbol and the third symbol are variably displayed. In this variation pattern selection table 202b, each variation pattern table is set for a low-probability gaming state, a high-probability gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, and a small hit only (including the number of transitional changes after the small hit).

  The variation patterns other than those for small hits are selected similarly to the first embodiment, and thus detailed illustration and description thereof will be omitted. As for the variation pattern dedicated to small hits, as shown in FIG. 68(a), the variation pattern dedicated to small hits is set when the hit/miss determination result is out and when it is a hit. Details of each variation pattern will be described later.

  As shown in FIGS. 68(b) to (c) and FIGS. 69(a) to (b), the variation pattern selection table 202e dedicated to small hits is set.

  FIG. 68B is a selection table 202e dedicated to small hits, which is selected when the status flag B is determined at the time of winning the small hits. In this selection table, the normal small hit variation pattern is selected for all variation type counters CS1. In this normal small hit variation pattern, after the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at a chance such as "341", the variable winning a prize device 65 is in a predetermined period (in this embodiment, 0.5 s). During), the small hit opening that is released is executed twice.

  FIG. 68C is a variation pattern selection table 202e dedicated to small hits, which is selected when the status flag C is determined when the small hit is won. When this selection table is selected, it is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 based on the value of the fluctuation counter 203g. When the value of the fluctuation counter 203g is 0, that is, when the small hit is won, the special small hit fluctuation pattern is set to correspond to the values of all the fluctuation type counters CS1. The fluctuation counter 203g, which will be described in detail later, is a counter for counting the number of shift fluctuations after a small hit. It should be noted that the small hit is selected as the small hit determination value in the case where the hit/miss determination result is out of order, so that no variation pattern for the hit is set.

  This special small hit variation pattern is, as shown in FIG. 71(a1), after the third symbol is variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 71(a2), the third symbol display device. The character "1st time" is displayed, the third symbol is reduced and displayed at the lower right, and is stopped and displayed at "341" indicating a small hit. In the present embodiment, the stop symbol indicating the small hit is "341". However, the stop symbol is not limited thereto, and may be another stop symbol, or a temporary symbol different from the normal time (for example, a musical note or the like). Combination of symbols).

  Next, since the fluctuation counter 203g is updated to 1 at the start of fluctuation of the suspended lottery game, if the result of the judgment is that it is out of correspondence, it corresponds to all fluctuation type counters CS1, An out-of-reach start/end variation pattern is set. This off-reach start/end variation pattern is displayed after the display shown in FIG. 71(a2), and then displayed from the state in which the third symbol has started variation, as shown in FIG. 71(b2). In, the left symbol and the right symbol of the third symbol are displayed in a reach display mode in which the same symbol is stopped, respectively, and then, after a predetermined time, the middle symbol is stopped and displayed in a symbol different from the reach symbol, and the result of the judgment is made. It is informed that was missed.

  On the other hand, if the lottery game that has been suspended next time is a win, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 170, the hit reach start/end variation pattern 1 is selected, and the value of the variation type couner CS1 is If 171 to 199, the hit start/end variation pattern 2 is selected. The hit reach start/end change pattern 1 and the hit reach start/end change pattern 2 are different from the above-mentioned out-reach start/end change pattern in that they are stopped with a symbol indicating a hit.

  FIG. 69A is a variation pattern selection table that is selected when the status flag D is determined when the small hit is won. When the variation counter 203g is 0, the special small hit variation pattern is set corresponding to all the variation type counters CS1. When the variation counter 203g is 1, and the hit/miss determination result is out of alignment, the out-reach start variation pattern 1 is set corresponding to the values of the variation type counter CS1 of 0 to 160, and the variation type counter CS1 is set. The out-reach start variation pattern 2 is set corresponding to the values 161 to 199.

  The out-reach start variation pattern 1 and the out-reach start variation pattern 2 are displayed with the third symbol varied as shown in FIG. 71(b1), and as shown in FIG. 71(b2), In the reach display mode, the variable display of the middle symbols is continuously displayed until the variable time ends.

  On the other hand, when the hit determination result of the next lottery game is a hit, the hit reach start end change pattern 1 is set in accordance with the value of the change type counter CS1 of 0 to 170, and changes. The hit reach start/end variation pattern 2 is set corresponding to the values of the type counters CS1 to 171 to 199.

  In this way, when the status flag C is determined, the variation pattern selection table dedicated to small hits is set until the small lottery is won and the lottery game is executed twice. Even if the win/fail judgment result is a hit due to a change on the way, the win/fail judgment result can be correctly notified.

  Further, when the fluctuation of the next pending lottery game is started, the fluctuation counter 203g is updated to be 2, so that if the result of the judgment is wrong, the fluctuation type counter 203g is changed to 0 to 50. Correspondingly, the out-reach variation pattern 1 is set, the out-reach variation pattern 2 is set in correspondence with the variation type counters CS1 to 180 of the variation type counter CS1, and the out-reach SP is associated with the variation types counter CS1 of 181 to 199. Reach variation pattern is set.

  Here, in the out-reach variation pattern 1 and the out-reach variation pattern 2, as shown in FIG. 71(c1-(A)), the character "second time" is displayed, and the third symbol is reduced and the display is started. It At this time, the third symbol reduced and started to be displayed is displayed in the reach display mode as shown in FIG. 71(c1-(A)). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71(b2), the reach display mode is displayed, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, a symbol different from the reach symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. In the out-reach variation pattern 1 and the out-reach variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 72(c2), an effect is displayed around the middle symbol during the variation of the middle symbol, and a reach display mode different from the normal time is displayed. Is notified to the player.

  Further, when the out-of-range SP reach variation pattern is selected, as shown in FIG. 71(c1-(B)), the character "development" is displayed, and the display of the third symbol is reduced and the display is started. The third symbol reduced and started to be displayed is displayed in the reach display mode. Then, a display mode is displayed to inform the player that a special reach called "next notice crane reach" as shown in FIG. 72(d1-(B)) is displayed. After that, the display mode of the crane reach as shown in FIG. 72 (d2) is displayed, and the crane lifts the middle pattern that is the hitting pattern, but it does not lift completely, it drops, and the symbol different from the reach symbol is stopped and displayed. A display mode is displayed that indicates the deviation.

  On the other hand, when the value of the fluctuation counter 203g is 2, and when the lottery game in which the winning/decision result is a hit is started, the hit reach fluctuation pattern 1 is set corresponding to 0 to 20 of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The hit reach variation pattern 2 is set corresponding to the variation type counters CS1 to 150, and the hit SP reach variation pattern is set corresponding to the variation type counters CS1 to 151 to 199. As for the hit reach variation pattern 1, the hit reach variation pattern 2, and the hit SP reach variation pattern, the hit/miss judgment results of the out-reach variation pattern 1, the out-reach variation pattern 2, and the out-reach SP reach variation pattern are notified in succession. The difference is that

  FIG. 69(b) is a variation pattern selection table 202e that is selected when the status flag E is determined when the small hit is won. The values up to 1 in the fluctuation counter 203g are the same as those in the selection table 202e (see FIG. 69(a)) selected in the case of the status flag D, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

  When the value of the variation counter 203g at which the number of transitional variations is the second is 2, and the hit/miss determination result is out of alignment, the out-reach mid-reach variation pattern 1 is set corresponding to 0 to 165 of the variation type counter CS1. The out-reach mid-reach variation pattern 2 is set in correspondence with the variation type counters CS1 to 166 to 199.

  Here, in the out-reach variation pattern 1 and the out-reach variation pattern 2, as shown in FIG. 72(d1-(A)), the character "3rd time" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, At the lower right of the display area of the three-symbol display device 81, the third symbol is reduced and started to be displayed in the reach display mode. After that, as shown in FIG. 72(c2), the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in the reach display mode, and the display mode in which the middle symbol keeps changing until the change time elapses is displayed.

  On the other hand, if the hit/no hit determination result is a hit, the hit reach variation pattern 1 is set corresponding to 0 to 20 of the variation type counter CS1, and the hit reach variation is associated with 21 to 150 of the variation type counter CS1. The pattern 2 is set, and the hit SP reach variation pattern is set corresponding to 151 to 199 of the variation type counter CS1. Here, the hit reach variation pattern 1 and the hit reach variation pattern 2 are set so that the character “3rd time” is displayed at the start of the variation. The other display modes are the same as those already described above.

  Next, when the value of the fluctuation counter 203g at which the number of transition fluctuations is the third time is 3, and the result of the judgment is wrong, the deviation Lee fluctuation pattern 1 corresponds to 0 to 140 of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The deviation reach variation pattern 2 is set corresponding to 141 to 170 of the variation type counter CS1, and the deviation SP reach variation pattern is set corresponding to 171-199 of the variation type counter CS1. Here, when the out-reach variation pattern 1 and the out-reach variation pattern 2 are started to be varied, the character "4th time" is displayed. The other display modes are the same as those already described above.

  On the other hand, when the hit/no hit determination result is a hit, the hit reach variation pattern 1 is set corresponding to 0 to 20 of the variation type counter CS1 and the hit reach variation pattern is associated with 21 to 150 of the variation type counter CS1. 2 is set, and the hit SP reach variation pattern is set corresponding to 151 to 199 of the variation type counter CS1. Here, when the variation of the hit reach variation pattern 1 and the hit reach variation pattern 2 is started, the character "4th time" is displayed. The other display modes are the same as those already described above.

  As described above, in the configuration of the fifth embodiment, a plurality of variations in the number of transition variations set in the status flag determined at the time of winning the small hit are varied so that the variation pattern is shown to the player as one variation mode. Is selected. In addition, at the start of the fluctuation, display modes such as “first time” and “second time” are displayed, and a related notification mode that makes the user think that the fluctuation is continuing is displayed. Can be made to appear as one variation. Furthermore, in the display mode which is displayed at the start of fluctuation, since the display area of the third symbol is reduced and displayed, it is difficult for the player to notice that the third symbol has started fluctuation, and the previous fluctuation still continues. It can make you feel like you are.

  Also, triggered by the small hit, the actual number of fluctuations for displaying multiple fluctuations as one fluctuation within the range of the number of pending quantities held at that time is determined by determining the status flag. Since the dedicated variation pattern selection table 203e is configured to be selected during that time, it is possible to easily execute the effect of making a plurality of variations look like one variation.

  Furthermore, the variation pattern selected in accordance with the number of transition variations after the time of the small win is set to change, and in the final variation, since the reach display mode is set to the display mode indicating the lottery result, When the small hit is won, it is easy for the player to be in the reach display mode, which makes the player think of it.

  A status flag storage area 203f, a fluctuation counter 203g, and a selection counter 203h are added to the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment in addition to the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment.

  The status flag storage area 203f is a storage area that stores a status flag for determining whether or not it is a period for selecting a dedicated variation pattern after a small hit in the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 67(c), five types of flags A to E are preset as the status flags.

  The status flag A is a flag that indicates a period during which a normal variation pattern is selected. The status flag B is a flag indicating that it is a period in which the variation pattern dedicated to the small hit is selected once. Similarly, the status flag C selects the variation pattern dedicated to small hits twice, the status flag D selects the variation pattern dedicated to small hits three times, and the status flag D selects the variation pattern dedicated to small hits four times. It is a flag indicating that it is a period to be performed.

  In addition, the status flag is a lottery in the process of S421 of the status transition process (FIG. 76, S329), which is one process in the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 75, S220) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later. Is selected from the status selection table 202c (see FIG. 67(b)).

  Here, when the status flag is selected, it is stored in the status flag storage area 203f of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. When the power is turned off, the status flag storage area 203f is backed up and stored by being supplied with power from the backup power supply. When the power is turned on again, it is possible to return to the state immediately before the power was turned off. When the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the status flag storage area 203f is set with the status flag A, which is the default setting.

The variation counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of transition variations after a small hit. The fluctuation counter 203g is updated by adding one by one in the process of S335 in the special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 75, S220) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Further, in the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 75, S220) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device S337, in the process of S221 in the special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 74, S140), the initial value 0 is reset. The selection counter 203h is a counter that is sequentially updated one by one within a range from an initial value of 0 to an upper limit value of 99. In the initialized state, the initial value 0 is set. When the upper limit value of 99 is updated and then further updating is performed, the initial value of 0 is updated. Although not shown, the selection counter 203h is updated by incrementing by 1 in the process of S1011 of the main process (FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Further, in the process of S421 of the status transition process (FIG. 76, S329) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, when the status flag (status) is determined from the status selection table 202c, the value of the selection counter 203h is acquired. It

<About the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113>
A sub fluctuation counter 223r and a sub status flag storage area 223s are added to the RAM 223 of the first embodiment of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

  The sub variation counter 223r is a counter for counting the number of transition variations in synchronization with the variation counter 203g provided in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. The variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 79, S2060) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated by adding 1 in the process of S1712. Further, the initial value 0 is reset in the process of S1714. In the present embodiment, although not shown, the initial value 0 is reset based on the reception of the opening command output from the main control device 110 for notifying the start of the jackpot game.

  The sub status flag storage area 223s is a storage area for storing the status flag based on a status command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the status flag determined by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. .. A status flag based on the status command received in the process of S1451 in the command determination process (FIG. 78, S2050) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is stored (set) in the sub-status flag storage area 223s.

<Regarding the variation display mode when the number of transition variations of this embodiment is set>
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, an example of a variation display mode in the number of transition variations set when the small hit is won in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a time chart showing an example of a case where a small win is won and the status flag E is determined when three or more holding numbers are stored.

  In the variation 1, it is determined that the small hit is won, the status flag E is determined, and the special small hit variation pattern is selected. During the period indicated by a1, after the variable display of the third symbol continues at high speed (see FIG. 71(a1)), as shown in FIG. 71(a2), during the period of a2, the character "first time" is Displayed on the 3 symbol display device 81, the third symbol is reduced to the lower right of the display area of the 3rd symbol display device 81, and out of the deviating symbol "341" (a symbol different from the jackpot symbol), a specific chance eye. Is displayed to confirm stop.

  Next, variation 2 shows a case where the out-reach start variation pattern 1 or the out-reach start variation pattern 2 is selected. As shown in FIG. 71(b1), after the high-speed variable display of the third symbol is displayed for a predetermined period within the period of b1, it is switched to the low-speed display, and the left symbol column is shown in FIG. 71(b2). Stop at "7" symbol, then the right column is similarly stopped at "7" symbol, the left and right symbols are displayed with the same symbol, the reach display mode in which the variable display of the middle symbol is continued is b2. Displayed for the indicated period.

  Then, the fluctuation display of fluctuation 3 is started. Variation 3 shows a case where the out-reach mid-reach variation pattern 1 and the out-reach mid-reach variation pattern 2 are selected. 71. When the notice period c1 and the period indicated by c1 are set, and the SW valid period during which the operation of the frame button 22 for 3 seconds is valid is set, and the frame button 22 is operated within that period, FIG. As shown in c1-(A), the characters "second time" are displayed until the end of the notice period c1. Further, when the frame button 22 is not operated even after the SW effective period has elapsed, a cut-in display mode in which the character "development" is displayed as shown in FIG. 71(c1-(B)) is displayed. ..

  As described above, by making the display mode displayed when the player operates the frame button 22 different from the display mode displayed when the frame button 22 is not operated, the frame button 22 is displayed by the player. The enjoyment of operating can be increased.

  After the advance notice period c1 ends, as shown in FIG. 71(c2), the reach display mode in which the reach symbol that is displayed in the variation 2 is displayed is displayed. Here, in the reach display mode in which the variation 3 is displayed, an effect or the like is displayed on the middle symbol, and an effect different from the variation 2 is executed.

  After the fluctuation time of fluctuation 2 has elapsed, the fluctuation display mode shown in fluctuation 4 is displayed. Variation 4 shows a case where either the out-of-range SP reach variation pattern or the hit SP reach variation pattern is selected. Of the period indicated by d1, 3 seconds is set as the SW valid period. Then, when the frame button 22 is operated within the SW valid period, as shown in FIG. 72(d1-(A)), the character "3rd time" is displayed until the end of the notice period. On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is not operated during the SW effective period, the cut-in display mode in which the characters "next notice crane reach" is displayed as shown in Fig. 72 (d1-(B)) is displayed. To be done. Then, in the period of d2, the special reach display mode (SP reach display mode) in which the display mode of lifting the jackpot symbol with the crane as shown in FIG. 72(d2) is displayed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of transitional fluctuations is determined in response to the fact that the small hit is won, and a dedicated selection table is provided so that the fluctuation pattern selected by the number of transitions is different from the normal fluctuation pattern. Configured to set. Therefore, it is possible to show by combining a plurality of variable display modes as if the plurality of variable displays (lottery game) set to the number of transitional changes from the small hit variable display mode are one variable display mode. ..

  In addition, since the variation pattern of the display mode having continuity with the variation display previously displayed is selected according to the number of transition variations, it is more likely that the plurality of variations are one variation for the player. Can be shown to. Therefore, in reality, even in a missed lottery game, it is possible to allow the player to play the game while maintaining the expectation for the jackpot.

  In addition, when the small hit is won, a variable display mode different from that in the normal time can be easily displayed, and the small hit to the player can further enhance the expectation of the big hit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game before the next big hit game.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Main Controller 110 in Fifth Embodiment>
The control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 76. It should be noted that the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment shows only changes, and the same process will not be illustrated and described.

  FIG. 73 illustrates a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment. The timer interrupt process (FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment is different from the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. The special symbol variation process (FIG. 17, S104) is changed to the special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 74, S140). Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the special symbol variation process 2 (S140) which is one process in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process 2 (S140). Special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 74, S140) in the fifth embodiment, special symbol variation start process (FIG. 18, S208) is special to the special symbol variation process (FIG. 17, S104) in the first embodiment. In the symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 75, S220), the process of S215 is changed to the process of S221, and the processes of S222 to S223 are added. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  After the processing of S213 or S214 is executed, the processing of S221 is executed. In the processing of S221, the start of the jackpot game is set (similar to the first embodiment), the fluctuation counter 203g is reset to 0 which is the initial value, and the status flag A is set (stored) in the status flag storage area 203f. ..

  In addition, in the processing of S211, when it is determined that the current lottery result is out of alignment (S211: No), it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit (S222). Here, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit, whether the value of the first random number counter C1 is the same as the above small hit determination value. In the processing of S222, when it is determined that the small hit is won (S222: Yes), the start of the small hit game in the small hit is set. Here, an operation of moving (opening) the variable winning a prize device 65 for a predetermined period (0.5 s in the present embodiment) is set twice. On the other hand, in the processing of S222, when it is determined that the deviation is other than the small hit (S222: No), the processing of S216 is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the special symbol variation start process 2 (S220) which is one process in the special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 74, S140) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation start process 2 (S220). The special symbol variation start process 2 (FIG. 75, S220) in the fifth embodiment is different from the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 18, S208) in the first embodiment in each of S328 to S331 and S334 to S337. Processing has been added. Since each processing of S321 to S327, S332 to S333, S338 to S339 is the same as each processing of S301 to S312, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of S325, when it is determined that the win/loss determination result is out (S325: No), it is determined whether the win/loss determination result is a small hit (S328). When it is determined that the hit/no hit determination result is a small hit (S328: Yes), the status shift processing is executed. (S329).

  Here, the status transition processing (S329) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing this status shift processing (S329).

  In the status transition processing (FIG. 76, S329), first, the status flag (status) is determined from the status selection table (see FIG. 67(b)) based on the current pending number and the value of the selection counter 203h (S421). .. It is determined whether or not the lottery result is the status flag B (S422). If the result is the status flag B (S422: Yes), the status flag B is set (stored) in the status flag storage area 203f (S423).

  On the other hand, in the processing of S422, when it is determined that the lottery result is not the status flag B (S422: No), it is determined whether the lottery result is the status flag C (S424). When it is determined that the lottery result is the status flag C (S424: Yes), the status flag C is set (stored) in the status flag storage area 203f (S425).

  On the other hand, in the process of S424, when it is determined that the lottery result is not the status flag C (S424: No), it is determined whether the lottery result is the status flag D (S426). When it is determined that the lottery result is the status flag D (S426: Yes), the status flag D is set (stored) in the status flag storage area 203f (S427). On the other hand, in the process of S426, when it is determined that the lottery result is not the status flag D, that is, the status flag E (S426: No), the status flag E is set in the status flag storage area 203f. (Storing) (S428). After that, the status command indicating the status flag set by any of the processes of S423, S425, S427, and S428 is set to be output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S429).

  Here, returning to FIG. 75, the description is continued. After the status transition processing (FIG. 76, S329) is executed, the display mode displayed on the first symbol display device 37 at the time of a small hit is set (S330). After that, the small hit variation pattern is determined from the small hit dedicated variation pattern selection table 202e based on the status flag stored in the status flag storage area 203f and the value of the variation type counter CS1.

  Next, after the processing of any one of S327, S331, and S333 is executed, the processing of S334 is executed. In the process of S334, it is determined whether the status flag 203f stored in the status flag storage area 203f is a status flag other than the status flag A (that is, any of the status flags B, C, D, and E). In the process of S334, if it is determined that the flag is other than the status flag A (S334: Yes), the value of the fluctuation counter 203g is incremented by 1 and updated (S335), and the updated value of the fluctuation counter 203g is set. It is determined whether or not the value is equal to or greater than the number of transitional changes set in the status flag (see FIG. 67C) (S336). When it is determined that the variation counter 203g has a value equal to or greater than the number of transition variations (S336: Yes), the value of the variation counter 203g is reset to 0 which is the initial value, and the status flag A is stored in the status flag storage area 203f. It is set (S337). Then, the process of S338 is executed. Further, when it is determined in the process of S336 that the value of the variation counter 203g is less than the number of transitional changes (S336), and when it is determined that the value is the status flag A in the process of S334 (S334: No), the process of S338 is executed.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Fifth Embodiment>
The control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80. It should be noted that the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the first embodiment shows only changes, and the same process will not be illustrated and described.

  Main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 77. The main process (FIG. 77) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment is different from the main process (FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. The button input monitoring/effect process (S1307) is displayed in a frame button input monitoring/effect process 4 (FIG. 80, S2630), the command determination process (FIG. 27, S1311) is displayed in the command determination process 5 (FIG. 78, S2050), and a variable display is displayed. The setting process (FIG. 30, S1312) is changed to the variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 79, S2060). The other processing is the same as the processing in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the command determination processing 5 (S2050) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 5 (S2050). In the command determination process 5 (FIG. 78, S2050) in the fifth embodiment, the processes of S1410 to S1414 are deleted from the command determination process (FIG. 27, S1311) in the first embodiment, and S1450 to S1451. Each process up to is added respectively. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of S1408, when it is determined that the hold command is not received (S1408: No), it is determined whether the status command output from the main control device 110 is received (S1450). If it is determined that the status command is received (S1450: Yes), the status flag indicated by the status command is set in the sub status flag storage area 223s (S1451). On the other hand, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (S1450: No), the process of S1415 is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the variable display setting process 2 (S2060) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 2 (S2060). In the variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 79, S2060) in the fifth embodiment, the respective processes of S1711 to S1714 are added to the variable display setting process (FIG. 30, S1312) in the first embodiment. There is. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of S1706, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is off (S1706: No) or after the process of S1710 is performed, the process of S1711 is performed. In the process of S1711, it is determined whether the status flag stored in the sub-status flag storage area 223s is other than the status flag A, that is, any of the status flags B, C, D, and E (S1711). .. When it is determined that the status flag is other than the status flag A (S1711: Yes), the value of the sub-variation counter 223r is incremented by 1 and updated (S1712).

  It is determined whether the value of the sub-variation counter 223r is equal to or larger than the number of transitional variations set in the status flag (S1713). When it is determined that the value of the sub-variation counter 223r is equal to or greater than the number of transitional fluctuations (S1713: Yes), the value of the sub-variation counter 223r is reset to 0 which is the initial value, and the status is stored in the sub-status flag storage area 223s. The flag A is set (S1714). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1713 that the value of the sub-variation counter 223r is less than the number of transitional changes, this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the frame button input monitoring/production process 4 (FIG. 80, S2630) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring/effect process 4 (S2630).

  In the frame button input monitoring/effect process 4 (FIG. 80, S2630), first, it is determined whether the value of the SW valid time counter 223j is 0 (S1521). When the fluctuation pattern command is received, a predetermined SW valid time valid counter 223j is set for this SW valid time in accordance with the fluctuation pattern. When it is determined that the SW valid time counter 223j is 0 (S1521: Yes), it is determined whether the SW pressing number counter 223k is greater than 0. The SW press count counter 223k is set to 1 based on the setting of the valid time counter 223j.

  When it is determined that the SW press number counter 233k is larger than 0 (S1522: Yes), the value of the SW press number counter 233k is set to 0 (S1523), and based on the value of the sub variation counter 223r. A display cut-in command to be output to the display control device 114 is set (S1524). Based on this display cut-in command, for example, a cut-in display mode as shown in FIG. 71(c1-(B)) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, as the cut-in display mode, a plurality of display modes other than the display mode as shown in FIG. 71(c1-(B)) are set. On the other hand, in the processing of S1523, when it is determined that the value of the SW pressing number counter 223k is 0 or less (S1522: No), this processing is ended.

  In the processing of S1521, when it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223j is a value other than 0 (S1521: No), the value of the SW valid time counter 223j is decremented by 1 and updated (S1525). .. It is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (operated) (S1526). When it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1526: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the SW pressing number counter 223k is greater than 0 (S1527). When it is determined that the value of the SW bypass number counter 223k is larger than 0 (S1527: Yes), the value of the SW press number counter 223k is decremented by 1 (S1528), and the value of the sub variation counter 223r. Based on the above, the display advance notice command to be output to the display control device 11 is set (S1529). On the other hand, in the process of S1526, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1526: No), or in the process of S1527, it is determined that the value of the SW press count counter 223k is 0 or less. If so (S1527: No), this process ends.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Display Control Device 114 in Fifth Embodiment>
A control process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 81. Note that only the changed points are shown in the control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the first embodiment, and the same processing will not be illustrated and described.

  81, the command determination processing 2 (S2120) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 2 (S2120). In the command determination process 2 (FIG. 81, S2120) in the fifth embodiment, the processes of S2208 to S2209 are deleted from the command determination process (FIG. 34, S2102) in the first embodiment, and S2121 to S2124. Each process up to is added respectively. The other processing is the same as the processing in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When it is determined in the process of S2121 that the display cut-in command has not been received (S2121: No), it is determined whether the display advance notice command has been received (S2123). In the processing of S2123, when it is determined that the display advance notice command is received (S2123:: Yes), the advance notice display data corresponding to the received display advance notice command is set in the display data table buffer ( S2124). On the other hand, in the process of S2123, when it is determined that the display advance notice command is not received (S2123: No), the process of S2210 is executed.

  In this way, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the special symbol (at the time of short-time gaming state execution, at the time of high probability game start, at the time of normal game start (start of low probability game)) and at the time of small hit win (in this embodiment, It is configured to switch the table for selecting (variable time). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the problem that the selection table of the variation pattern is frequently switched, the variation time is frequently changed, and the gambling performance of the game becomes unstable.

  With such a configuration, when the small hit is won, the fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation pattern selection table dedicated to the small hits up to a predetermined number of fluctuations. A changed effect can be given.

  Further, like the configuration of the present embodiment, it is configured with an effect set to be continuous with the effect of the preceding and following fluctuation patterns so that a plurality of fluctuations including a small hit may appear as one fluctuation. Since a plurality of fluctuation patterns have been set, and a fluctuation pattern selection table dedicated to small hits has been set so that each fluctuation pattern can be combined and selected in succession, multiple fluctuations can be easily set by the player. It can appear as if it were one variation.

  Furthermore, in the variation pattern selection table for exclusive use in small hits, which is selected when the small hit is won, the final change is executed in a variation pattern that is easy to select in the case of a big hit when the result of success/failure determination such as special reach or super reach. Since it is configured such that the same effect as that of the big hit is executed, the player can further increase the expectation for the jackpot.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of transitional changes is set a plurality of times when the small hit is won, and the lottery game which is a big hit in the number of times in the middle is included, the big hit is executed. Since the number of transitional fluctuations is reset, a series of fluctuations is completed with a big hit, and thereafter, similarly, when an effect that makes a plurality of fluctuations look like one fluctuation is executed. You can expect it to be a big hit. In addition, even after the big hit, continuous production (for example, production of variation start from the reach state) is continuously selected, so that it is possible to suppress a problem that gives the player a feeling of strangeness.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when the small hit is triggered, a variation pattern of a plurality of times is changed so that the variation of the special symbol of a plurality of times thereafter is shown to the player as if it is a variation of one special symbol. Since it is configured to be combined with each other, it is possible to make it appear as if it is a single deviation variation even if it is a deviation variation of a plurality of times. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the chance that the player will be disappointed that he is out of the game. In addition, since it is possible to configure a plurality of fluctuations including a fluctuation that is a jackpot as if it were one fluctuation, fluctuations in which the hit/miss judgment result displayed before the jackpot is a deviation However, since it can be combined with the variation of the jackpot to make it appear as one variation, the variation of the deviation can be effectively used.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, at the time of winning the small hit, it is configured to determine the number of transitional fluctuations within the number of reserved balls of the lottery game that is being held, so that a plurality of fluctuations may be one fluctuation. It is configured to be able to look like. Not limited to this, it may be configured such that the number of times of transitional change equal to or greater than the number of reserved balls is set, and a configuration in which it appears as if multiple changes are continuing. With such a configuration, all the fluctuations are in the reach state, and by performing the production such as the chance production of whether or not the lottery game which is a big hit can be started, more players can participate in the game. Motivation can be increased.

<About the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the case where the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes prefetching and performs the prefetching effect over a plurality of variations based on the result of the prefetching has been described. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the number of transitional fluctuations is determined with the winning of the small hit as a trigger, and when the maximum effect execution frequency determined within the number of transitional fluctuations is executed, the remaining This is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that a reach display mode of variable time corresponding to time is selected. The same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding Display Mode of Pachinko Machine 10 in Sixth Embodiment>
A display mode of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 82. FIG. 82A is a time chart showing the variable display mode when the status flag E is set when the small hit is won when the alternative display mode is not set. In the sixth embodiment, when the small hit is won, the status flag is determined and the number of transition fluctuations is set as in the fifth embodiment. In the example shown in FIG. 82(a), the status flag E is set and the number of transition changes is set to 3 times.

  In the sixth embodiment, the special reach display mode set by the final change in the number of transitional changes (in the example shown in FIG. 82(a), the change 4 starts from the start of the change 2) starts the change display. The period until it is performed is set as the possible production time. In addition, the maximum number of times of performance is set on the basis of the result of winning/deciding judgment and the value of the selection counter 203h at the time of winning the small hit. The maximum number of times of performance is set by setting the maximum number of times as one effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the player operating the frame button 22 during the possible production time. .. Characters such as "second time" and "third time" as shown in FIG. 71(c1-(A)) and FIG. 72(d1-(A)) are displayed as the effect contents based on the number of times of effect. It At that time, the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the lower right display area.

  In the example shown in FIG. 82(a), the maximum number of presentations is set to three, but the notice production is only executed up to two times and the maximum number of presentations is not reached. In this way, if the maximum number of presentations has not been reached, the reach display mode of the preset variation 4 display mode is waited until the player operates the frame button 22 until the available production time elapses. (In the present embodiment, the special reach display mode (SP reach display mode)) is displayed.

  Thus, based on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22, the notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 up to the maximum effect number. Here, for the maximum number of presentations, when the result of the determination of variation 4 is a hit, a larger number of productions is selected, so the player operates the frame button 22 to determine the result of the presentation earlier. The result can be predicted from the number of executions of the notice production. Therefore, it is possible to give the player more enjoyment of pressing the frame button 22.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 82(b), the display mode in the case of FIG. 82(a) when the notice effect is executed up to the maximum number of times will be described. FIG. 82(b) is a time chart showing the case where the notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 up to the maximum effect number. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 82(b), the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the fluctuation time of fluctuation 3, and the third notice effect, which is the maximum effect count, is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is what was displayed. In this case, the alternative variable display mode closer to the remaining time is selected based on the remaining time until the variable 4 finishes the variable display. This alternative variation display mode will be described in detail later, but as shown in FIG. 86(c), a plurality of variation patterns having different variation times are preset for each of the judgment results and closer to the remaining time. An alternative variation pattern of variation time is selected. The alternative variation pattern is configured in a special reach display mode in which a specific reach display mode is set, as shown in FIG. 72(d2).

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment>
In the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment, a big hit random number table 202a, a fluctuation pattern selection table 202b, a status selection table 202c, status information 202d, and a small hit dedicated fluctuation pattern selection table 202e are set.

  The jackpot random number table 202a, the variation pattern selection table 202b, the status selection table 202c, and the status information 202d are the same as those already described in the fifth embodiment, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The small hitting-only variation pattern selection table 202e in the sixth embodiment is shown in FIGS. 84(a) to (c) and FIGS. 85(a) to (b). The normal small hit variation pattern and the special small hit variation pattern in the small hit exclusive variation pattern in the sixth embodiment are the normal small hit variation pattern and the special small hit variation pattern configured in the same display manner as in the fifth embodiment. Each is composed of a fluctuation pattern. The deviation variation patterns 1 to 3 are configured in a non-reach display mode from the variation start to the variation stop of the third symbol, and the variation time is different. The off SP reach variation patterns 1 and 2 are configured in a special reach display mode including a reach display mode such as a crane reach display mode as shown in FIG. 72(d2) described in the fifth embodiment. Further, the hit SP reach variation patterns 1 and 2 are different from the out-of-range SP reach variation patterns 1 and 2 in that the hit/miss determination result is displayed as a hit.

  The variation pattern selection table 202e for small hits shown in FIG. 84(b) is a table selected when the status flag B is selected, and similarly, the variation pattern selection table for small hits only shown in FIG. 84(c) 85e is a status flag C, and a variation pattern selection table 202e dedicated to small hits shown in FIG. 85A is a status flag D, and a variation pattern selection table dedicated to small hits shown in FIG. 85B. Reference numeral 202e is a table selected when the status flag E is selected. Note that the method of selecting each variation pattern is the same as the method already described in the fifth embodiment, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  A status flag storage area 203f, a fluctuation counter 203g, and a selection counter 203h are added to the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment, respectively, in addition to the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the first embodiment. Has been done. It should be noted that each of them has the same configuration as that already described in the fifth embodiment, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 83.

  In the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment, the effect time setting table 222k, the maximum number of times determination table 222m, and the alternative variation pattern are included in the ROM 222 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the first embodiment. A table 222n and an alternative effect lottery table 222p are added respectively. Although not shown, a selection table of each fluctuation pattern set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is also set in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113. Therefore, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp controller 113 can determine the variation pattern selected by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 from the winning command output from the main controller 110. Even when the variation pattern selection table is switched depending on the number of held numbers, the variation pattern that reaches the reach or super-reach is fixed by the value of the variation type counter CS1 regardless of the number of held numbers. The MPU 221 of the control device 113 can discriminate a variation that reaches reach or super reach.

  The effect time setting table 222k is data for setting the effect time (display time) of the notice display displayed in the variation pattern dedicated to the small hit displayed on the third symbol display device 81 shown in FIG. 86(a). It's a table. The greater the number of times, the longer the effect time is set. In addition, when the lottery game corresponding to the change number of transitions includes a lottery game that is a big hit, it is configured such that a larger number of effect counts are easily selected than when the lottery game is not included. Therefore, it is possible to make the player predict the winning/disapproval determination result by the number of times of performance, and when a large number of times of performance is selected, the player can play a game while expecting a big hit more. It should be noted that, as the notice effect displayed here, a display mode for notifying the number of effects as shown in FIG. 71(c1-(A)) is displayed as described in the fifth embodiment. In the present embodiment, the display mode for notifying the number of times of the notice effect is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the temporary third symbol or the like is displayed so that the pseudo reach effect or the temporary third symbol is stopped and displayed. Such a display may be executed to make it appear as if more lottery games have been performed, or an effect in which characters or the like are displayed may be performed.

  The maximum effect number determination table 222m is a data table for determining the maximum number of notice effects displayed during the display of the small hitting-only variation pattern in which the transition variation number is set in the third symbol display device 81. This maximum notice count determination table 222m is selected by lottery corresponding to the transition change count set in the process of S2264 in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 5 (FIG. 96, S2060) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The maximum number of times of performance is determined based on the result of game determination and the value of the performance counter 223h. As a result, a larger maximum number of times of performance is determined when the winning lottery game is included in the lottery game executed during the number of transitional changes. Therefore, by executing many notice productions, it is possible to make the player have an expectation for a big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 86(c), the alternative variation pattern table 222n is a data table in which the variation time of the alternative variation pattern is set. As an example of the alternative fluctuation pattern, a deviation SP reach fluctuation pattern 1, a deviation SP reach fluctuation pattern 2, a hit SP reach fluctuation pattern 1, and a hit SP reach fluctuation pattern 2 are set.

  The alternative effect lottery table 222p is a data table for determining whether or not to set an alternative variation pattern when the notice effect is executed the maximum number of times. In the alternative effect lottery table 222p, the value of the effect counter 223h is set so that the alternative variation pattern is set more easily when the winning lottery game included in the number of transitional variations is included than when it is not included. Has been allocated.

  In the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment, the SW pressing number counter 223k, the sub status flag storage area 223s, the total time storage area 223t, the possible production time storage area 223u, and the reach variation time storage area 223v. , And the production counter 223w is added.

  The SW pressing number counter 223k has the same configuration as that already described in the second embodiment, and the sub-status flag storage area 223s has the same configuration as that described in the fifth embodiment. Detailed description is omitted.

  The total time storage area 223t is a storage area in which, when the number of transitional changes is set, the total variation time of the lottery game for the number of transitional changes is stored. This total time storage area 223t is the variation of each variation pattern corresponding to the number of transition variations (the value of the number of prefetch counters) in the process of S2253 of the effect setting process (S2075 of FIG. 95) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The total time is set.

  The possible production time storage area 223u is a storage area for storing the time during which the notice production can be displayed when the number of transitional changes is set. This possible production time storage area 223u is the value set in the total time storage area 223t in the process of S2261 in the frame button input monitoring/production process 5 (FIG. 96, S2060) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The value obtained by subtracting the reach seconds of the final variation of the transition variation number is stored. In the process of S2276, the available production time is subtracted and updated based on the elapsed time.

  The reach variation time storage area 223v is a storage area for storing the reach variation time of the final variation in which the transition variation number (prefetching number) is set. This reach variation time storage area 223v stores the number of reach seconds in the process of S2252 in the effect setting process (FIG. 95, S2075) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

  The effect number counter 223w is a counter for counting the number of notice effects. The maximum effect number is set to this effect number counter 223w when the maximum effect number is determined from the maximum effect number determination table (see FIG. 86(b)). The frame button input monitoring/effect process 5 (FIG. 96, S2060) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated by subtracting 1 in the process of S2275 and resetting to the initial value 0 in the process of S2269. To be done.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Main Controller 110 in Sixth Embodiment>
The control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89. It should be noted that the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment shows only changes, and the same process will not be illustrated and described.

  The timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 87. The timer interrupt process (FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment is different from the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. Special symbol variation process (FIG. 17, S104) is changed to special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 74, S140), and start winning process (FIG. 19, S105) is changed to starting winning process 3 (FIG. 88, S150). ing. Other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Since the special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 74, S140) has the same configuration as that of the fifth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 88, the start winning processing 3 (S150) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 3 (S150). In the start winning process 3 (FIG. 88, S150) in the sixth embodiment, the processes of S407 to S411 are deleted from the start winning process (FIG. 19, S105) in the first embodiment, and the prefetch lottery process is performed. (FIG. 89, S430) is added. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 89, the prefetch lottery process (S430) which is one process in the start winning process 3 (FIG. 88, S150) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the prefetch lottery process (S430).

  In the prefetch lottery process (FIG. 89, S430), first, based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in S406 in the start winning process 3 (FIG. 88, S150), it is determined whether or not it is determined as a big hit at the start of fluctuation. (S431). When it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (S431: Yes), the jackpot winning command, which can determine the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S406, is set to be output to the voice lamp control device 113. ..

  On the other hand, in the process of S431, when it is determined that the hit is out (S431: No), it is determined whether the hit is a small hit (S433). When it is determined that it is a small hit (S433: Yes), the small hit prize command with which the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S406 can be determined is set to be output to the voice lamp control device 113. (S434).

  On the other hand, in the processing of S433, when it is determined that the small hit is not a small hit, it is determined whether the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern that is a super reach (S435). If it is determined that the variation pattern is a super reach (S435: Yes), the out-reach winning command capable of determining the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S406 is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. The output is set to be possible (S436). On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern does not reach the super reach (S435: No), the deviation winning command indicating the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S406 is set (S437).

<Control Processing Executed by Audio Lamp Control Device 113 in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 90 to 97, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described. It should be noted that the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the first embodiment shows only changes, and the same process will not be illustrated and described.

  With reference to FIG. 90, the main processing (FIG. 90) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing (FIG. 90) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 according to the sixth embodiment is different from the main processing (FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 according to the first embodiment. The frame button input monitoring/effect process (S1307) is the frame button input monitoring/effect process 5 (FIG. 96, S2640), and the command determination process (FIG. 27, S1311) is the command determination process 6 (FIG. 91, S2070). The variable display setting process (FIG. 30, S1312) is changed to the variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 79, S2060). The variable display setting process 2 (FIG. 79, S2060) is the same process as that described in the fifth embodiment above, and the other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 91, the command determination processing 6 (S2070) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing 6 (S2070). The command determination processing 6 (FIG. 91, S2070) in the sixth embodiment is different from the command determination processing (FIG. 27, S1311) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment in S1410 to S1414. Each processing up to is deleted, and each processing from S2071 to S2075 is added. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the process of S1408, when it is determined that the hold command is not received (S1408: No), it is determined whether the winning command is received from the main control device 110 (S2071). When it is determined that the winning command is received (S2071: Yes), the winning command receiving process is executed (S2072).

  This winning command reception process (S2072) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the winning command receiving process (S2072). In the winning command receiving process (FIG. 92, S2072), first, the received winning command indicating the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2081).

  It is determined whether the received winning command is a jackpot winning command (S2082). When it is determined that the jackpot winning command has been received (S2082: Yes), the jackpot determination flag 223e is set to ON (S2083). Then, the process of S2085 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received winning command is not the jackpot winning command (S2082: No), it is determined whether the received winning command is a miss reach command (S2084). When it is determined that the command is the out-reach winning command (S2084: Yes), the prefetch effect lottery process 2 is executed (S2085). The prefetch effect lottery process 2 (S2085) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. After the prefetch effect lottery process 2 (FIG. 93, S2072) is executed, the jackpot determination flag 223e is set to OFF (S2086). Then, this process is completed. On the other hand, in the processing of S2084, when it is determined that the command is not the miss reach command (S2084: No), this processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the prefetch effect lottery process 2 (S2085) which is one process in the winning command reception process (FIG. 92, S2072) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the prefetching effect lottery process 2 (S2085). S2222-S2234 in the prefetch effect lottery process 2 (FIG. 93, S2085) in the sixth embodiment are the same as the prefetch effect lottery process (FIG. 29, S1601 to S1613 in S1412 in the first embodiment, and further, The processing of S2221 is added to the processing of the first embodiment.

  In the process of S2221, it is determined whether or not the winning information storing area 223a (holding area) stores a small lottery game, that is, a small winning command. When it is determined that the small hit prize command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2221: Yes), this process is ended.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2221, when it is determined that the small hit prize command is not stored (S2221: No), the processing of S2222 is added.

  Returning to FIG. 91, the description will be continued. In the process of S2071, when it is determined that the winning command is not received (S2071: No), it is determined whether the status command is received from the main control device 110 (S2073). If it is determined that the status command is received (S2073: Yes), the status command reception process is executed (S2074).

  This status command reception processing (S2074) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing this status command reception processing (S2074).

  In the status command processing (FIG. 94, S2074), first, it is determined whether the received status command is the status command indicating the status flag B (S2241). If it is determined that the status flag is B (S2241: Yes), the status flag B is set in the sub status flag storage area 223f and the prefetch counter is set to 0 (S2242). No prefetch is set (S2243), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the status flag indicated by the received status command is other than the status flag B (S2241: No), it is determined whether the received status command is the status command indicating the status flag C or not. (S2244). If it is determined that the status flag is C (S2244: Yes), the status flag C is set in the sub status flag storage area 223f, and the prefetch counter is set to 1 (S2242). Although illustration is omitted, after that, pre-reading is set, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the status flag indicated by the received status command is other than the status flag C (S2244: No), it is determined whether the received status command is a status command indicating the status flag D. (S2246). If it is determined that the status flag is D (S2246: Yes), the status flag D is set in the sub status flag storage area 223f, and the prefetch counter is set to 2 (S2247). Although illustration is omitted, after that, pre-reading is set, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the status flag indicated by the received status command is other than the status flag D, that is, the status flag E (S2246: No), the status flag E is set in the sub status flag storage area 223f, The prefetch count counter is set to 3 (S2248). Although illustration is omitted, after that, pre-reading is set, and this processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 91, the description will be continued. After the status command reception process (FIG. 94, S2074) is executed, the effect setting process is executed (S2075). Then, this process is completed. The effect setting process (S2075) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 95.

  FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process (S2075). In the production setting process (FIG. 95, S2075), first, based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a corresponding to the value of the read-ahead number counter set in the read-ahead number counter storage area 223g, the small hit exclusive The fluctuation pattern information is reacquired from the fluctuation pattern selection table 222 (S2251). This makes it possible to update the prefetched information in association with the small hitting-specific variation pattern selected by the main control device 110, when the small hit is won.

  When the process of S2251 is executed, the reach time of the final change corresponding to the value of the prefetch count counter is set in the reach change time storage area 223v (S2252). The total variation time of each variation pattern selected in each lottery game corresponding to the prefetch count counter is set in the total time storage area 223t as the total variation time (S2253).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96, a frame button input monitoring/production process 5 (S2640) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing the frame button input monitoring/effect process 5 (FIG. 96, S2640).

  In the frame button input monitoring/production process 5 (FIG. 96, S2640), first, as the production available time in the production available time storage area 223u, the total variation time stored in the total time storage area 223t is changed to the reach variation time storage area 223v. A value obtained by subtracting the stored reach seconds is set (S2261). It is determined whether the possible production time set in S2261 is greater than 0 (S2262). When it is determined that the possible production time is a value larger than 0 (S2262: Yes), it is determined whether the number of productions of the production counter 223w is set (S2263).

  If it is determined that the number of presentations is set (S2263: Yes), the process of S2265 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of presentations is not set (S2263: No), the maximum number of presentations is stored in the winning information storage area 223a corresponding to the number of prefetches for which the maximum number of presentations is set from the maximum presentation number determination table 222m. The maximum number of times of effect is determined based on the hit/miss judgment information and the value of the effect counter 223h, and is set in the effect number counter 223w (S2264).

  In the process of S2265, it is determined whether the value of the SW effect time counter 223m is 0 (S2265). When it is determined that the value of the SW effect time counter 223m is a value other than 0, the value of the SW effect time counter 223m is decremented by 1 and updated (S2266), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the SW effect time counter 223m is 0 (S2265: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the effect number counter 223w is 0 (S2267). When it is determined that the value of the effect number counter 223w is not 0 (S2267: Yes), the alternative effect lottery process is executed (S2268). Here, the alternative effect lottery process (S2268) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the alternative effect lottery process (S2268). In the alternative effect lottery process (FIG. 97, S2268), first, it is determined whether the total fluctuation time is longer than 25 seconds (S2281). When it is determined that the total variation time is longer than 25 seconds (S2281: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired and the lottery result is acquired from the alternative effect lottery table 222p (see FIG. 86(d)). To do.

  It is determined whether the lottery result acquired in the process of S2282 is replacement (winning) (S2283). When it is determined that the lottery result is alternative (S2283: Yes), it is determined whether the total fluctuation time is longer than 30 seconds (S2284). When it is determined that the total variation time is longer than 30 seconds (S2284: Yes), the out SP SP reach variation pattern 2 or the hit SP reach variation pattern 2 is determined based on the determination result, and the corresponding display command is displayed. Is set (S2285). Then, this process is completed. On the other hand, in the process of S2284, when it is determined that the total variation time is 30 seconds or less (S2284: No), the out-of-reach SP reach variation pattern 1 or the hit SP reach variation pattern 1 is determined based on the determination result. Then, the corresponding display command is set (S2286). Then, this process is completed.

  In this way, when the notice effect is displayed up to the maximum number of effects set on the third symbol display device 81, the remaining total change time at that time is determined, and the change display of the alternative change pattern is possible. If it is time, whether to display the alternative variation pattern is determined by lottery. Here, the lottery as to whether or not to display the alternative variation pattern is executed based on the win/no determination result of the varied lottery game. Since the display is set to be easy to display, the player can have a greater expectation for a big hit by displaying the alternative variation pattern. Further, when the remaining time of the total fluctuation time is long, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player has to wait for a long time until the reach display mode of the final fluctuation is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game.

  In the present embodiment, after the alternative variable display mode is displayed, if there is a remaining time until the variable time further elapses, in the state where the third symbol shakes and fluctuates with all variable display stopped, It waits until the variable time elapses. After that, the fixed stop is displayed based on the change time. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think of a more natural display mode until the player stops.

  Returning to FIG. 96, the description will be continued. After the alternative effect lottery process (FIG. 97, S2268) is executed, the effect number counter 223w is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S2269). The value of the available production time storage area 223u is reset to 0 which is the initial value (S2270). Then, this process is completed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2267, when it is determined that the value of the effect number counter 223w is not 0 (S2267: No), it is determined whether the frame button 22 is pressed (S2271). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S2271: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the SW pressing number counter 223k is greater than 0 (S2272). When it is determined that the value of the SW pressing number counter 223k is greater than 0 (S2272: Yes), the value of the SW pressing number count 223k is subtracted by 1 (S2273), and the value of the effect number counter 223w is obtained. The display advance notice command corresponding to is set (S2274). The value of the rendering number counter 223w is decremented by 1 (S2275), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2271, the frame button 22 is not pressed (S2271: No), or in the process of S2272, when it is determined that the value of the SW pressing number counter 223k is 0 or less (S2272: No), the process ends.

  In this way, in the present embodiment, when the small hit is triggered, a plurality of subsequent variations of the special symbol are shown to the player as if they were one variation of the special symbol, so that a plurality of times Since the variation patterns are combined, it is possible to make it appear as if the variation is a single variation even if the variation is a plurality of variations. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the chance that the player will be disappointed that he is out of the game. In addition, since it is possible to configure a plurality of fluctuations including a fluctuation that is a jackpot as if it were one fluctuation, fluctuations in which the hit/miss judgment result displayed before the jackpot is a deviation However, since it can be combined with the variation of the jackpot to make it appear as one variation, the variation of the deviation can be effectively used.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of advance notice displays (displays for the first time, the second time, etc.) are displayed on the player's frame button 22 during the effect that makes the changes appear as if they were one time. Since the display is made based on the operation, it is possible to give different effects to each player depending on the operation timing of the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game because of the same effect.

  Further, since the maximum number of times the notice display is displayed is configured such that a larger number of times is selected in the case of a big hit, based on the result of the judgment, the player displays the notice display, and at that number, The determination result can be predicted in advance, and the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the maximum number of advance notice displays is displayed, an alternative variation pattern close to the time is selected and displayed depending on the remaining time until the last variation is completed. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the player from getting bored and give the player an effect according to the changing time.

  In addition, the alternative variation pattern is not always selected, but is drawn based on the result of winning/decision determination, and in the case of a big hit, the alternative variation pattern is easily selected, so that the alternative variation pattern is displayed. , It can be expected that the player will be a big hit.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the notice display is configured to display the characters of the first time, the second time, etc., but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, it may be configured such that a special symbol (a symbol exclusively for reach or a symbol with a changed pattern) is variably displayed or a character or the like is displayed. With such a configuration, the player can enjoy the notice display.

  In the present embodiment, the number of transitional fluctuations is determined within the number of reserved balls at the time of winning the small hit, and the fluctuation of the special symbol including the small hits is shown as one fluctuation within the number of times. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to set the number of times of transitional change equal to or greater than the number of holding balls, and perform the variation effect in a continuous variation pattern within the number of transitions. In such a case, for example, as a chance effect that the fluctuation pattern starts to change from the reach state every time within the number of transitional changes, it is configured to execute an effect as to whether or not the player can start a change that is a big hit. You may.

  In such a configuration, each time the variation pattern dedicated to small hits that starts varying in the reach state starts to vary, it is configured to notify the player of the number of times the variation pattern dedicated to small hits has continuously changed. Good. With this configuration, the player wants to start a lottery game, which is a big hit while the chance effect is executed, and the player can continue playing the game.

  In the present embodiment, the status command determined by the main controller 110 is output. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp controller 113 determines the status flag executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. You may comprise so that the same process as the process to perform may be performed. With this configuration, the number of commands output from main controller 110 can be reduced.

  Further, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 may be configured to determine the win/no determination result and the jackpot type from the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110. In such a case, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can easily determine the jackpot type from the variation pattern command by setting dedicated variation pattern commands for each type such as jackpot A and jackpot B. You can Therefore, the number of commands output by main controller 110 can be reduced.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 106. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the case where the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes prefetching and performs the prefetching effect over a plurality of variations based on the result of the prefetching has been described. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, after the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 performs the process of opening the variable winning device 65, and before the variable winning device 65 opens, the small winning is triggered. It is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that a process that interferes with the operation is executed. The same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 98 is a sectional view taken along the line AA of the variable winning device 65 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment. The variable winning device 65 is rotated by about 90 degrees toward the front side of the game board 13 to receive a game ball falling on the surface of the game board, and a rotary door 620 for taking the game ball into the variable winning device 65. And a plunger link 610 for rotating the rotary door 620 forward based on the operation of the solenoid 600 (209). The plunger link 610 has a shaft portion 610b and is rotatably fixed inside the variable winning device 65.

  One end of the plunger link is fixed to the tip of the plunger 600a of the solenoid 600, and when the solenoid 600 is electrically operated and the plunger 600a is attracted, the plunger link 610 is rotated around the shaft portion 610b. . The plunger link 610 is provided with a locking portion 610a protruding toward the rotary door, and the locking of the locking portion 610a and the rotary door 620 is released by the rotation of the plunger link 610. The rotating door 620 rotates 90 degrees toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 due to its own weight.

  In addition, as shown in a partial top view of the inside of the variable winning a prize device 65 of FIG. 99, the restriction solenoid 640 (209) is orthogonal to the solenoid 600 inside the variable winning a prize device 65 in the sixth embodiment. Is provided. The restriction solenoid 640 is a push-type solenoid, and has a configuration in which the plunger 640a projects forward when electrically operated. When the regulation solenoid 640 operates and the plunger 640a projects, it comes into contact with the plunger link 610 and regulates the rotation of the plunger link 610.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 98, when the plunger link 610 rotates, the tip of the locking portion 610a is located above the locking recess 620b with the locking portion 610a provided on the back side of the rotary door 620. The center of gravity of the rotary door 620 is deviated so that the rotary door 620 starts to rotate by its own weight by abutting against the wall portion and slightly rotating the rotary door 620 toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10. The time t required for the locking portion 610a to come into contact with the upper wall of the locking recess 620b of the rotary door 620 is 50 ms.

  Although details will be described later, less than 50 ms after the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the winning of the small hit and operates the solenoid 600 to execute the opening process of the variable winning device 65, when the small winning is won. The control for operating the restriction solenoid 640 is executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from easily determining that the winning determination result is a small hit by opening the variable winning device 65 when the small hit is won.

  In addition, when the number of transitional fluctuations is set at the time of winning the small hit and the effect of showing a plurality of fluctuations as if they were one change is executed, by the opening operation of the variable input/output device 65 by the small hit winning, It is possible to suppress a problem that the player easily discriminates as a plurality of variations.

<Control Processing Executed by Main Controller 110 in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 100 to 106, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. It should be noted that the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment shows only changes, and the same process will not be illustrated and described.

  The timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing this timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process (FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment is a special symbol variation process (FIG. 17, S104) in comparison with the timer interrupt process in the first embodiment. It is changed to the symbol variation process 3 (FIG. 101, S160). The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the special symbol variation process 3 (S160) which is one process in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 100) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. To do. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing 3 (S160). Special symbol variation process 3 (FIG. 101, S160) in the seventh embodiment, the special symbol variation process (FIG. 17, S104) in the first embodiment, the process of S222-S223 is added, the special symbol variation The start process (FIG. 18, S208) is changed to the special symbol variation start process 3 (FIG. 102, S240). Since each process from S222 to S223 is the same as S222 to S223 of the special symbol variation process 2 (FIG. 74, S140) in the fifth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the special symbol variation start process 3 (which is one process in the special symbol variation process 3 (FIG. 101, S160) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment. 102 and S240) will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation start process 3 (S240). In the special symbol variation process 3 (FIG. 102, S240) in the seventh embodiment, each process from S340 to S342 is added to the special symbol variation process (FIG. 18, S208) in the first embodiment. .. The other processing is the same as the processing of the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the process of S306, when it is determined that the lottery result of S304 or S305 is not a big hit (S306: No), the process of S340 is executed. In the process of S340, it is determined whether the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the small hit determination value (S340). When it is determined that it is a small hit (S340: Yes), the display mode at the time of a small hit displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S341). After that, the variation pattern at the time of small hit is determined (S342), and the process of S311 is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In the main process (FIG. 103) of the seventh embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1003) is different from the main process (FIG. 24) of the first embodiment in the jackpot control process 2 (FIG. 104, S1020). The article opening/closing process (S1005) is changed to the electric accessory opening/closing process 2 (FIG. 106, S1040). The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 104, the jackpot control process 2 (S1020) which is one process in the main process (FIG. 103) in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the big hit control process 2 (S1020).

  In the jackpot control process 2 (FIG. 104, S1020), first, it is determined whether the jackpot start is set in the process of S215 in the special symbol variation process 3 (FIG. 101, S160) (S1021). When it is determined that the jackpot start has been set (S1021: Yes), an opening command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the jackpot game start is set (S1022).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit start is not set (S1021: No), it is determined whether or not the big hit game is being played (S1023). If it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (S1023: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot game is being played (S1023: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing for starting a new round (S1024). When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round game (S1024: Yes), the opening of the large opening 65a of the variable winning a prize device 65 is set (S1025).

  A round number command for outputting the number of newly opened rounds (the number of jackpot games) to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S1026). Then, this process is completed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1024, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the new round (S1024: No), it is determined whether or not the closing condition for the large opening 65a is satisfied (S1027). In the present embodiment, in the jackpot game, if 10 game balls are won in the large opening 65a or 30 seconds have passed since the game ball was opened, it is determined that the closing condition has been established. When it is determined that the closing condition for the large opening 65a is satisfied (S1027: Yes), the closing of the large opening 65a is set (S1028).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1027, when it is determined that the closing condition of the large opening 65a is not satisfied (S1027: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1029). The ending effect is an effect that informs the player of the end of the jackpot game in a voice or a display mode of the third symbol display device 81. When it is determined that it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S1029: Yes), the ending command for notifying the end of the jackpot game is set to the voice lamp control device 113 (S1030).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1029, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1029: No), the small hitting process is executed (S1031). Then, this process is completed.

  The small hitting process (S1031) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing this small hitting process.

  In the small hit process (FIG. 105, S1031), first, in the process of S223 in the special symbol variation process 3 (FIG. 101, S160), it is determined whether the small hit start is set (S1101). If it is determined that the small hit start is set (S1101: Yes), if it is determined that the small hit start is set (S1101: Yes), the start of the small hit game is voiced. An opening command for notifying the control device 113 is set (S1102).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the start of the small hit is not set (S1102: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit game is in progress (S1103). When it is determined that the small hit game is not in progress (S1103: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit game is being played (S1103: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing to start a new round (S1104). When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round game (S1104: Yes), the opening of the large opening 65a of the variable winning a prize device 65 is set (S1105). Then, the operation of the regulation solenoid 640 is set (S1106).

  In this way, by setting the solenoid 600 to the open state and then setting the regulating solenoid to the operating state as well, the regulating solenoid operates to cause the plunger 640a to rotate the plunger link 610 before the large opening port 65a opens. By moving to the restricted position, the large opening 65a is restricted from opening. Therefore, even if the execution of the small hit is set, the rotary door 620 does not rotate, and it is possible for the player to hardly recognize that the small hit has been won than the operation of the rotary door.

  A round number command for outputting the number of newly opened rounds (round number of small hit games) to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S1107). Then, this process is completed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the large opening 65a is satisfied (S1108). In the present embodiment, in the small hitting game, it is determined that the closing condition has been established when 10 game balls have been won in the large opening 65a or 0.5 seconds have passed since the game ball was opened. When it is determined that the closing condition of the large opening 65a is satisfied (S1108: Yes), the closing of the large opening 65a is set (S1109).

  On the other hand, in the process of S1108, when it is determined that the closing condition of the large opening 65a is not satisfied (S1108: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1111). The ending effect is an effect in which the player is notified of the end of the small hitting game by a sound or a display mode of the third symbol display device 81. Here, in the case of a small hit game, the player is not notified of the small hit, and a display such as a notice effect display (in the present embodiment, "first time") is executed.

  When it is determined that it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S1111: Yes), an ending command for notifying the end of the jackpot game is set to the voice lamp control device 113 (S1112). Then, this process is completed. Further, in the processing of S1111, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1111: No), this processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the electric accessory opening/closing process 2 (S1040), which is one of the main processes (FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment, will be described. . FIG. 106 is a flow chart showing this electric accessory opening/closing process 2 (S1040).

  In the electric accessory opening/closing process 2 (FIG. 106, S1040), first, it is determined whether or not the opening of the large opening 65a is set (S1041). The setting for opening the large opening port 65a is set in the processing of S1025 in the big hit control processing 2 (FIG. 104, S1020) and the processing of S1106 in the small hit processing (FIG. 105, S1031).

  When it is determined that the opening of the large opening 65a is set (S1041: Yes), the solenoid 600 of the large opening 65a is set to ON (S1042). On the other hand, it is determined whether the operation of the restriction solenoid 640 is set (S1043). The operation of the restriction solenoid 640 is set by the process of S1106 in the small hitting process (FIG. 105, S1031). When it is determined that the operation of the restriction solenoid 640 is set (S1043: Yes), the restriction solenoid 640 is set to ON (S1044). Then, this process is ended.

  In the processing of S1041, if it is determined that the opening of the large opening 65a is not set (S1041: No), it is determined whether the closing of the large opening 65a is set (S1045). The closing of the large opening 65a is set by the processing of S1028 in the big hit control processing 2 (FIG. 104, S1020) and the processing of S1109 in the small hit processing (FIG. 105, S1031). When it is determined that the large opening port 65a is set to be closed (S1045: Yes), the solenoid 600 is turned off (S1046). After that, the restriction solenoid 640 is set to OFF (S1047), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1045, when it is determined that the large opening 65a is not closed (S1045: No), the process ends.

  In this way, when the small hit is won, the restriction solenoid 640 is set to on immediately after the process of turning on the solenoid 600 that opens the large opening 65a. Since 50 ms is required from the start of the operation of the solenoid 600 to the start of the rotation of the rotary door 620, the rotation of the rotary door 620 must be started. To the position before the plunger link 610 rotates, the tip of the plunger 640a of the restriction solenoid 640 can be moved to a position where the rotation of the plunger link 610 is restricted. Therefore, at the time of a small hit, the opening of the large opening 65a is set, but the large opening 65a is not opened, and it is difficult for the player to identify that a small hit has occurred.

  Here, as shown in the fifth to sixth embodiments, in the case of performing an effect in which a plurality of fluctuations are displayed as if they were one fluctuation, when a small hit is won, a plurality of fluctuations are preferably made. I want to make it difficult for the player to understand the boundaries of each fluctuation. Here, as in the configuration of the present embodiment, when the small hit is won, the small hit is set, but by restricting the rotation door 620 so as not to rotate, it is possible to change the small hit. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to know what is. Therefore, it is possible to make a plurality of fluctuations including a small hit appear as one fluctuation.

  In the present embodiment, the small hit is configured such that the round in which the large opening 65a is opened is executed twice for 0.5 seconds. By setting the big hit (two round big hit) of the same operation, in the subsequent game, the probability of winning/disapproving judgment is set to the type of the big hit that becomes the high-probability game state (probability variation game), and the third symbol display By the same notification (displayed with the same symbol) for the two-round big hit and the small hit by the device 81, the player cannot distinguish the small hit and the two-round big hit. Here, based on the two-round big hit, the player performs one of the plurality of fluctuations by executing an effect that makes one fluctuation show a plurality of fluctuations including two rounds. You can have the expectation for a bigger jackpot by the performance that is shown.

<Regarding Modification of Pachinko Machine 10 in Seventh Embodiment>
A modified example of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 109. In the seventh embodiment, the restriction solenoid 640 is provided to prevent the opening operation of the rotary door 620 of the variable winning a prize device 65, and the rotation of the rotary door 620 is restricted. On the other hand, in the modified example of the seventh embodiment, the variable winning device 65 does not have the regulation solenoid 640, and the solenoid 600 of the variable winning device 65 is operated, and then the plunger link 610 opens the rotating door 620. This is different from the seventh embodiment in that the excitation of the solenoid is released and the process of restricting the opening is executed by the time until the operation is started (50 ms in the present embodiment). Since the other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Modification of Seventh Embodiment>
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 107. A small hit open counter 203i is added to the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the modification of the seventh embodiment. The other configurations are the same as those of the seventh embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The small hitting opening counter 203i is a counter for measuring the time from the opening operation of the solenoid 600 of the variable winning device 65 to the closing operation of the variable winning device 65 based on the small winning result. is there. This small hit opening counter 203i is set with a counter value corresponding to a time of 20 ms in the process of S1056 in the small hit process 2 (FIG. 108, S1050) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Further, it is updated by subtracting one by one in the process of S1074 in the electric accessory opening/closing process 3 (FIG. 109, S1070) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

<Control Processing of Main Controller 110 in Modification of Seventh Embodiment>
Next, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 109. Detailed description of the same processing as that of the seventh embodiment will be omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 108, the small hitting process 2 (S1050) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. The small hitting process 2 (FIG. 108, S1050) is a process executed instead of the small hitting process (S1051 in FIG. 105) in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing this small hitting process. In the small hitting process 2 (FIG. 108, S1050) of the seventh embodiment, the processes of S1105 and S1110 are deleted from the small hitting process (FIG. 105, S1031) of the seventh embodiment, and the process of S1056 is executed. Has been added.

  When the process of S1055 is executed, the small hit opening counter 203i is set to a counter value indicating 20 ms (5 in the present embodiment) (S1056). Then, the process of S1057 is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the electric accessory opening/closing process 3 (S1070) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the modification of the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 109 is a flow chart showing this electric accessory opening/closing process 3 (S1070).

  In the electric accessory opening/closing process 3 (FIG. 109, S1070), first, it is determined whether or not the opening of the large opening of the variable winning device 65 is set (S1071). If it is determined that the opening of the large opening is set (S1071: Yes), the solenoid 600 of the large opening is set to ON (S1072). On the other hand, when it is determined that the opening of the large opening is not set (S1071: No), it is determined whether the value of the small hit opening counter 203i is greater than 0 (S1073). When it is determined that the value of the small hit opening counter 203i is larger than 0 (S1073: Yes), the value of the small hit open counter 203i is decremented by 1 (S1074). It is determined whether or not the value of the small hit opening counter 203i is 0 (S1075).

  When it is determined that the value of the small hit opening counter 203i is 0 (S1075: Yes), the solenoid 600 of the large opening opening is set to OFF (non-excitation) (S1076), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the small hit opening counter 203i is 0 or less (S1073: No), or when it is determined that the value of the small hit opening counter 203i is not 0 (S1075: No), The process of S1077 is executed.

  In the process of S1077, it is determined whether or not the closing of the large opening is set (S1077). When it is determined that the large opening is closed (S1077: Yes), the large opening solenoid 600 is set to OFF (S1078).

  As described above, when the small winning portion wins the large opening of the variable winning device 65, it is set to open twice for 0.5 seconds each time, but in any opening, the large opening is opened. Before the door 620 starts to rotate, the solenoid 600 is set to be non-excited to forcibly restrict the opening of the large opening during the small hit.

  As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine that the small hit has been won at the time of the small hit, because the player has opened the opening. Therefore, at the time of winning the small hit, by displaying the same combination of the third symbols as that of the miss on the third symbol display device 81, it is more difficult for the player to understand that the small hit has been won.

  In addition, as shown in the fifth to sixth embodiments, in a presentation in which a plurality of fluctuations including a small hit are displayed as if they are one fluctuation display mode, it is difficult to understand that the small hit is won. , More variations can be shown to the player as if they were one variation.

  In the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114. The command to be determined is determined, and then the command is transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 to the display controller 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the display controller 114, and when the command is received by the display controller 114, the display controller 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113. Then, after that, the display control device 114 may be configured to transmit a command to the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, in this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether or not the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused. If not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 at the transfer destination.

  In this case, whether or not the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused is determined by the image controller 237 accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, being in use). And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (that is, it is in use). ) And) may be provided in the image controller 237 and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the buffer RAM of the transfer destination.

  Alternatively, the MPU 231 monitors a signal transmitted/received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or a signal transmitted/received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236, and from the state of the signal, the resident It may be confirmed whether the video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts or ends access to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time so that the MPU 231 can Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, whether the scan is in the blank period, the MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237, or a notification from the image controller 237. If the scanning state is in the blank period, the video RAMs 235 and 236 may be determined to be unused. As a result, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not it is unused, so that the determination can be performed easily.

  Further, in this case, the MPU 231 causes the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to transfer data that is not Null data to the address indicated by the pointer 233f. When the information exists, the image data may be read from the character ROM 234 according to the transfer data information, and the process of transferring to the normal video RAM 236 may be started. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring image data according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table etc., the drawing of that sprite The image data which is not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  The process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in the display main process executed by the MPU 231 or in the main process loop. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute the image data transfer process by utilizing the time during which the display control device 114 does not perform the important process such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process. Further, since the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing are executed prior to the display main processing and the like, the MPU 231 does not affect the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing, and Can perform the transfer process of.

  In the above-described embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM by using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but uses the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 in common. In the address system used, a different address area may be assigned to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. With this configuration, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed to the image controller 237. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. That is, when designating the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply designated. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the instruction for performing the designation. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as the information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data, the storage RAM type is not included, and the address set in the common address system is simply used. Since it is only necessary to specify the address of the storage destination, the construction of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be directly connected to 237. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input/output specifications of the character ROM 234 into the input/output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. Good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM is used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234a is used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even if the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to directly access the character ROM 234.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this, and is configured by a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage unit such as a hard disk. May be done. Although such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow reading speed, by configuring the display control device 114 as described in the above embodiment, an image can be displayed at a desired time without any problem. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the NOR ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 has been described. The first program storage area is provided in a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium capable of performing a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the MPU 231 first provides the area after the system reset is released. It is also possible to store a part of the boot program that is executed by the. For example, instead of the NOR ROM 234d, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231 after system reset is released. A part of the boot program executed first may be stored.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) is provided with the first program storage area 234d1, and a part of the boot program first executed in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium that can perform a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a is used as an internal bus (bus line 240). It is also possible to provide a first program storage area in that memory and store a part of the boot program first executed in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. For example, instead of the NOR ROM 234d, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided on the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided on the MPU 231. In, a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, a case has been described in which the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then, When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and the internal bus (bus line) is read. 240) to the MPU 231. In this case, if the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” for the internal bus (bus line 240) after releasing the system reset, is the boot program already stored in the first program storage area 234d1 set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since it is being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is designated by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” within a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, the MPU 231 can activate the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the display control device 114 or the third symbol display device 81 can be immediately started. You can

  When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified in the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program storage area 234d1. Alternatively, the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be read directly from and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" within a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, and thus the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the display control device 114 or the third symbol display device 81 can be immediately started. You can In this case, the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may not be set in the buffer RAM 234c. As a result, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is provided by being connected to the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an internal bus (bus It may be directly connected to the line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the bridge circuit, even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not directly connected to the resident video RAM 235, the resident video RAM 235 can be connected. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  In the above embodiment, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more A video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, and image data corresponding to images according to various modes may be resident in each, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a 1-port type (1 input/output port) DRAM has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a multi-port type is also possible. Type RAM may be used. As a result, writing to and reading from the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. Therefore, for example, while reading image data from the normal video RAM 236 and drawing an image, the data is read from the character ROM 234. It is possible to perform parallel processing of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the drawing process from being delayed due to the writing of the image data.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and one RAM is divided into a resident area and a normal area. It may be divided and the same contents as the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in the respective areas. When the resident area and the normal area are configured by one RAM, the I/O port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by the read or write processing by one of the resident area and the normal area. It is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

  The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. In this case, at least resident image data corresponding to the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately in response to a reception command received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 or other input from the outside. It is preferably resident in the video RAM 235.

  In the above embodiment, the case where a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident has been described, but all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. You may. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawn image data obtained by the drawing by the image controller 237. May be.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 continues to retain its contents without being overwritten during power-on has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main controller 110 or the audio lamp controller 113 is not necessarily limited thereto. Based on a command received from the third symbol display device 81, when the image to be displayed is greatly different, the image data to be made resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated based on a predetermined trigger. Good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as the transition period while changing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated when the other resident images are updated, and is retained in the resident video RAM 235 without being updated. You can leave it. Further, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly made resident, and the read image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. The transfer may be performed during unused (that is, during a period in which image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer instruction (transfer). The image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to (data information), and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is unused (that is, during a period in which image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may do so.

  When updating the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is displayed using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. It may be displayed on the three-symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read the image data to be newly made resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. Good. Alternatively, the image controller 237, which has received the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231, accesses the character ROM 234, reads the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do it. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

  In the above embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal when the power outage is stored is stored in advance. In the display main process or main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after the power is turned on, the RAM judgment value is confirmed before starting the transfer of the main image data at power-on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, If the RAM judgment value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be stored normally, and therefore the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. It may be configured to. In this case, the image data may be transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even when the system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of the instantaneous blackout and the display main process or the execution of the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. If so, it is possible to prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to shorten the time required for restoration from a power failure. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a whose reading speed is slow, it takes a long time to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 normally remains due to a momentary power failure or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235, for example. Further, instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the data may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided inside the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (bus line 240) where data signals are frequently exchanged. The transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is set to one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but the storage capacity is not necessarily limited to this and may be set appropriately. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen included in the third symbol display device 81, during the period (blank period) in which scanning is performed on the blank region which is the scanning region other than the display region in which the actual image is displayed, the buffer The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be a data capacity such that the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be completed. As a result, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 that occurs during this blank period. .

  In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred from another buffer RAM. You may comprise. Further, the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM, and while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another area in which the image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written in the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. The processing time can be shortened.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after power-on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to transfer the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the power-on main image. can do. Since image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during this period, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are turned on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area. Although the case of transferring to the 235b has been described, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. Thus, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 while the character ROM 234 is being displayed. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Since image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during this period, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during the transfer of the image data corresponding to, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. It may be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. Also, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on, and the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used for power-on. When the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the time main image or the like, The image data to be made resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without using the buffer RAM 237a.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation of the resident video RAM 235. Although the case of transferring to the image area 235b has been described, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred. Image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. Good. Further, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and stored in the normal video RAM 236. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the variable image, the resident video RAM 235. If the image data is not read from the memory, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed earlier without using the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the player operates the frame button 22, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a rear image change command and a frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the rear image change command and the frame button. The case where the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of super reach are changed based on the operation command has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the game state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the game state, for example, in accordance with the change of the game state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. As a result, the display control device 114 can change the presentation mode of the back image and the super reach according to the game state based on the back image change command and the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the game state of the gaming machine 10 and change the rear face image and the effect mode of super reach according to the game state. Then, the rear image after the change or the image data corresponding to at least part of the range of the rear image corresponding to the changed super-reach of the effect mode is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The rear image can be immediately displayed from the resident range by using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

  Further, the display control device 114 may change the rear image according to the rules of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed rear image is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. You may. Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred by the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the combined data table, or the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new rear image is stored in the sub area, or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored is defined. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined such that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when the back image is returned to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. It is possible to suppress an increase in load.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, by transmitting an error command to the display control device 114, The case where the display control device 114 immediately displays the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110, The control device 110 may detect a vibration error, and the main control device 110 may transmit an error command for notifying the error to either the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. Then, when an error command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, and further transmits an error command for notifying the error to the display control device 114. You may.

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. When the vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 38) by turning on the error occurrence flag and further turning on the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error. When it is determined that the warning image is set, the warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 39). In this case, this eliminates the need to send and receive the error command from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, so that the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 has been described, but instead of the vibration sensor or together with the vibration sensor, the magnet sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13. Good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of the sphere from being changed by the magnetic field of a magnet or the like and to intentionally enter the entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Then, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, when it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 by the main controller 110 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is generated. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main controller 110 via the voice lamp controller 113 or directly to the display controller 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, when it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field is output. An error command that conveys an error may be transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 to the display controller 114. Then, in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 81 is made resident. In the above configuration, the display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 when receiving an error command that conveys a magnetic field error from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, when it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 by the display control device 114 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113. May turn on the error occurrence flag and turn on the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, when the display control device 114 receives an error command from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113 or grasps the occurrence of a magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the display ROM 114 stores the character ROM 234. Even when configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235, the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error without delay is shown in the third pattern. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the third symbol display device 81, so that an illegal action is given to the player. Can be deterred.

  When the drawing content necessary for changing a part or all of the color tone in one effect is defined by the additional data table or the display data table, in the additional data table or the display data table, 1 in the third symbol display device 81 Corresponding to an address in which the time (20 msec in this embodiment) for displaying an image for a frame is defined as one unit, at that time, the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed and the sprite after the change The color information specifying the color tone may be specified. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite whose color tone is changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. If the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. The drawing list may be created by replacing the color information defined by the additional drawing content of the data table. This allows the image controller 237 to draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  Further, when the drawing content necessary for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect is defined by the display data table, in the display data table, the image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81. Is associated with an address represented by 1 unit of the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) displayed, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new sprite type. The drawing information of the sprite to be displayed may be defined. Then, in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, the MPU 231 sets the sprite type to be replaced and the sprite type to be newly displayed at the address indicated by the pointer 233f. When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, various sprites specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified. Instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. Thereby, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the case where the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing content specified in the display data table is included in the display data table has been described. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary when drawing an image according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added to each address in association with identification information (“additional effect 1”, “additional effect 2”...) For identifying the additionally displayable effect. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the effect to be additionally displayed is determined, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. You may comprise.

  As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used for drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used, according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of the image based on the additional drawing content. Drawing of many sprites can be specified by the additional drawing contents. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various types of effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above-described embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that causes the player to select the super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table, and the player is selected. Although the explanation has been given on the case of specifying only the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach, the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table. May be. This makes it possible to easily specify the drawing contents of the super reach selected by the player. Further, since it is not necessary to prescribe drawing contents corresponding to all super reach in the display data table, it is possible to prevent the data size of the display data table from increasing.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. However, the additional drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed may be defined in the additional data table. In this case, the work RAM 233 may be provided with an additional data table buffer, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, the additional data table may define not only the additional drawing content but also the transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data necessary for drawing the image performed according to the additional drawing content. Good. With this, it is possible to specify the rendering content of the effect to be additionally displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the rendering. Therefore, from the additional data table and the additional transfer data table, Compared with the case where the drawing content and the transfer data information are specified, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

  In the above-described embodiment, the display control device 114 describes the case where the display data table is prepared for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the variation effect is, for example, A display data table is prepared for each element such as "fluctuation start-up", "high-speed fluctuation", "advance notice effect", "normal reach", "super reach", and the display data table is prepared according to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command. After specifying the elements required for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets required for the specified variation effect are combined into one, and the final regular display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may do it. In many cases, "variation start-up", "high-speed variation", "normal reach", etc. are commonly displayed for each variation pattern. Therefore, by making the variation effect into elements and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element in this way, the data table can be efficiently provided.

  In the above-described embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table use the common pointer 233f to identify the drawing content and the transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every display interval (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) of the image for one frame in which the drawing process is finished will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The third symbol display device 81 is driven so that the image for one frame is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), so that the V interrupt signal is displayed every time the image for one frame is displayed. By sending, the time interval can be kept accurate without timing.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded based on the drawing target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information expanded first from the other frame buffer. The case where the image is read out and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the image controller 237 should expand the drawn image each time the drawing list is received. Alternatively, the image information previously developed may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Further, every time the image controller 237 transmits the image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be developed and the image information is output to the third symbol display device 81. The frame buffer to be used may be replaced.

  In the above-described embodiment, after the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d and before the finalized display effect is completed, the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. When neither the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) nor the demo command (demonstration command for display) is received, when setting the display data table for demonstration corresponding to the demonstration effect in the display data table buffer 233d Although described, this may be set again in the display data table buffer 233d as the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect. Further, in this case, the fixed display effect is produced until either the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) or the demo command (display demo command) is received from the main controller 110 via the voice lamp controller 113. The fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d each time the display ends. As a result, it is possible to continue displaying the final display effect on the third symbol display device 81 until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110.

  In the above-described embodiment, the demonstration effect is described as a case where the rear image is changed and the third symbol, which is the main symbol to which the numbers “0” to “9” are not added, is stopped and displayed. The present invention is not limited to this, and the third symbol composed of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semitransparent state. Further, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image which is completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In the above embodiment, in the display control means 114, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power-on. In the case of transferring to the time-varying image area 235b, displaying the main image at power-on after the transfer is completed on the third symbol display device 81, and then transferring the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the display control means 114, after the power is turned on, first, only the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235, and after the transfer is completed, the power is turned on. After displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81, image data to be resident including image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after power-on, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be used in the operation check in the player, the hall personnel, or the factory at the time of manufacturing. You can immediately check that the operation has started without any problems when the power is turned on.

  Further, in this case, the MPU 231 may monitor the completion of the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Thus, if the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. On the basis of the above, by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, a simple fluctuation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is preferably transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to more quickly perform the variable display by the power-on variation image.

  In the above-described embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table correspond to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit, and the content of the image to be drawn (drawing content) at that time or the transfer at that time. The case where the information of the image data (transfer data information) is defined has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display content may be defined at every predetermined time interval. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, if the third symbol display device 81 is to display an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since one frame image is displayed every second, the display data table may define the display contents at intervals of 1/30 second.

  Further, in the display data table, as the sprite type to be drawn defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite type itself is not designated, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be defined. In the display control device 114, since the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manages the address of. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the address and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is provided with the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and it is stored for each sprite whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Although the case has been described, instead of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233 when the image data of the predetermined sprite type is transferred, and refers to the predetermined image data. May be already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not stored, an instruction to transfer image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the transfer instruction of the image data of the predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores the information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233 and the image data of the sprite type is stored. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above embodiment, when the image data of the predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233i. It has been described that the MPU 231 determines whether or not the normal video RAM 236 stores the predetermined sprite type image data in the normal video RAM 236, and executes the transfer process non-execution process. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 to check whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. May be stored. The work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if the MPU 231 needs to transfer the image data of the predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 stores the image data in the normal video RAM 236 regardless of the storage state of the image data. On the other hand, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  In the above embodiment, the case where only the image data corresponding to the “rear surface A” of the plurality of rear images is made to be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is not limited to this. Image data corresponding to two or more rear images may be made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the rear image used in some super reach may be made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by making the back image of the super reach, which is expected to appear frequently or frequently, resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data transfer process from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times that the

  In the above-described embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the transfer instruction of the image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 instructs the transfer instruction at the predetermined time specified by the display pointer. The case where the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data instructed by the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described. Information about the sprite type required in the table is described, and the MPU 231 is configured to transfer necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the head of the display data table. 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and outputs the image data of the image type from the character ROM 234 normally. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer to the video RAM 236 for use.

  In the above-described embodiment, when performing the variation effect, a case has been described in which a high-speed variation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed so that the player cannot visually recognize them is displayed. However, instead of displaying this high-speed variation , All the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size to the extent that they cannot be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images y in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed. .

  In the above-described embodiment, the main control device 110 performs the main control of the reserved ball number command each time the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is updated (that is, when the value is increased or decreased). The case of transmitting from the device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c in the main controller 110 increases, the holding number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113. Further, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is decremented by 1. As a result, the number of times main controller 110 transmits the hold number command to voice lamp controller 113 and the number of times voice lamp controller 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. It is possible to reduce the control load of the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the above embodiment, the winning of the first entrance 64 and the passage of the second entrance 67 are configured to be reserved up to four times, respectively, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four. However, the number may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of balls to be variably displayed based on the winning in the first ball entrance 64 is a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is the number of balls to be reserved. The display may be performed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. You may comprise.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the symbol as the identification information on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and it is not limited to the vertical direction. The symbols may be moved and displayed along a predetermined direction such as a direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbols, and, for example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed together with the symbols, or may be displayed in various motions or changed in addition to the symbols. It also includes a display effect that is displayed. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  Further, the present invention may be carried out on a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine (commonly called a 2nd right thing, a 3rd right thing, etc.) that can increase the expected value of a big hit until a big hit state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times) including that. May be implemented as). Further, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. In addition, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for confirming and displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a ball launching handle is not provided. There are things. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, or due to, for example, the operation of the stop switch or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stopping is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is caused to do so. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restriction on the place where the game machine is installed due to the separate handling of the medal and the ball.

  Further, some or all of the above-described respective embodiments and modified examples may be combined and implemented.

  Below, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be shown.

<Feature A group>
It has main control means for executing game control and sub-control means for executing game control based on a control signal from the main control means, and the main control means is based on establishment of a start condition. , An acquisition means for acquiring the first information, a win/fail judgment means for judging whether or not the first information acquired by the acquisition means is win/loss of the lottery game based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and a win/no judgment result of the win/fail judgment means. Before and after the lottery condition is satisfied, a win/loss determination signal generating device that generates a win/loss determination signal for notifying the slave control device, a determination information storage device that stores the first information until the lottery condition is satisfied. And an advance hit determination signal generating means for generating a advance hit determination signal based on the first information and notifying the slave control means, wherein the slave control means outputs from the main control means. On the basis of the hit determination signal is displayed means for displaying the identification information indicating the hit determination result, the display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, based on the advance hit determination signal A gaming machine having prior information storage means for storing prior information each time the start condition is satisfied, wherein the main control means dynamically displays the identification information on the display means. A dynamic display information storage means for storing the dynamic display information storage means, a dynamic display information determination means for determining one piece of dynamic display information from the dynamic display information storage means, and the dynamic display information determination means. Dynamic display information signal generation means for generating a dynamic display information signal for notifying the subordinate control means of the dynamic display information determined by the subordinate control means. Based on the dynamic display information signal output by the dynamic display mode selection means for selecting a dynamic display mode, and based on the reception of the advance win/fail judgment signal, a specific display mode relating to the game effect. And a specific display number determining means for determining the number of times to be displayed on the display means, the specific display mode is displayed on the display means over the dynamic display mode of the continuous lottery game. A gaming machine A1 characterized by being present.

  According to the gaming machine A1, in the main control means for executing the game control, the acquisition means acquires the first information based on the establishment of the start condition. The first information acquired by the acquisition means determines whether or not the lottery game is true or false based on the establishment of the lottery condition. The hit/miss judgment signal generating means generates a hit/miss judgment signal for notifying the slave control means of the hit/miss judgment result of the hit/miss judgment means. The first information is stored in the determination information storage means until the lottery conditions are satisfied. Before the lottery conditions are met, a prior win/non-judgment signal based on the first information is generated by the pre-win/no-judgment signal generation means, and is notified to the slave control means. In the sub-control means that receives the control signal from the main control means and controls the game, based on the win/no judgment signal output from the main control means, the identification information indicating the win/no win determination result is displayed on the display means. .. The identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the display control means. Preliminary information is stored in the preliminary information storage means each time the start condition is satisfied, based on the preliminary hit determination signal. In the main control means, a plurality of dynamic display information for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means is stored in the dynamic display information storage means. One piece of dynamic display information is determined by the dynamic display information determination means from the dynamic display information storage means based on the result of the judgment. The dynamic display information signal generating means generates a dynamic display information signal for notifying the slave control means of the dynamic display information determined by the dynamic display information determining means. In the sub control means, the dynamic display mode is selected by the dynamic display mode selection means based on the dynamic display information signal output from the main control means. The number of times of displaying the specific display mode relating to the game on the display means is determined by the specific display number determination means based on the reception of the advance hit determination signal. The specific display mode is displayed on the display means over the dynamic display mode of the continuous lottery game. Thereby, the awareness of the identification information is lowered by the specific display mode, and the dynamic display modes of a plurality of times can be made to appear as one dynamic display mode. Therefore, it is possible to show a novel effect to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine A1, the sub-control unit has a specific lottery unit that executes a lottery of whether or not to display the specific display mode based on the receipt of the advance win/fail judgment signal. When the determination means determines to display the specific display mode by the specific lottery means, the determination means displays the specific display mode on the display means less than the number of times the start condition stored in the advance information storage means is satisfied. When the number of times to be determined is determined by the specific display number determining means, the specific display mode corresponds to each of the first information stored in the pre-information storage means. A gaming machine A2, wherein the gaming machine A2 is displayed once each over the continuous two dynamic display modes.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are produced. That is, in the secondary control means, the lottery for determining whether or not to display the specific display mode is performed by the specific lottery means based on the receipt of the pre-win/win determination signal. When it is determined that the specific display mode is displayed by the specific lottery means, the number of times of displaying the specific display mode on the display means is determined by the specific display frequency determining means within less than the number of times the start condition stored in the advance information storage means is satisfied. To be done. When the number of times of display is determined by the specific display number determining means, the specific display aspect is once each over two continuous dynamic display aspects displayed corresponding to the first information stored in the advance information storage means. Is displayed. Thereby, the dynamic display mode of the first information stored in the determination information storage means is displayed in the specific display mode from the end of the dynamic display to the start of the dynamic display mode. It can be shown to the player as if it were a static display mode. Therefore, there is an effect that a novel effect can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine A2, the specific lottery means determines that the prior information indicated by the received prior win/failure determination signal is a win or information that is determined to be a win among the prior information stored in the prior information storage means. Is stored, the probability of determining to display the specific display mode is set to be high, and the gaming machine A3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the prior information indicated by the received prior win/failure determination signal is determined to be a hit or the information determined to be a hit is stored in the prior information stored in the a prior information storage means, the specific display mode is set. The probability of deciding to display is set high by the specific lottery means. Thereby, when the specific display mode is displayed, it can be configured to be a jackpot easily, and by displaying the specific display mode, the player can be expected to win the jackpot. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the number of times of displaying the specific display mode is determined by the specific display frequency determining means, and corresponds to the dynamic display mode of starting the dynamic display while the final specific display is displayed. If the result of the determination of the prior information to be performed is wrong and there is the prior information that is determined to be hit in the prior information storage means, the dynamic display mode corresponding to the prior information indicates dynamic display. A gaming machine A4 having a number changing means for changing the number determined by the specific display number determining means so that the final specific display is displayed during the start.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2 or A3, the following effects are produced. That is, the number of times of displaying the specific display mode is determined by the specific display number determining means, and whether or not the prior information corresponding to the dynamic display mode in which the dynamic display is started while the final specific display is displayed is determined. If the result is wrong and there is prior information that is determined to be hit in the prior information storage means, the final specific display is performed while the dynamic display mode corresponding to the prior information starts dynamic display. The number of times determined by the specific display number determining means to be displayed is changed by the number of times changing means. As a result, when the winning game is stored among the ones stored in the advance information storage means, the dynamic display mode started while the final specific display mode is being displayed is hit. Since the number of times of the specific display mode is changed to be the dynamic display mode of, the expectation for the jackpot can be increased by displaying the specific display mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine A2 or the gaming machine A3, the main control means is a dynamic display determination information acquisition means for acquiring dynamic display determination information for determining the dynamic display information based on establishment of the start condition. , A prior dynamic display for generating a prior dynamic display signal for notifying the slave control means of the prior dynamic display information based on the dynamic display determination information acquired by the dynamic display determination information acquisition means. Signal generating means, the slave control means, upon receiving the preliminary dynamic display signal, the preliminary dynamic display information indicated by the preliminary dynamic display signal, the preliminary information. The specific display count determining means stores the specific display count in the dynamic display mode in which dynamic display is started while the final specific display is being displayed. The game is characterized in that the number of times of the specific display mode is determined so that the final dynamic display mode becomes the specific dynamic display mode by judging from the hit or the prior dynamic display information. Machine A5.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2 or A3, the following effects are produced. That is, in the main control means, the dynamic display determination information for determining the dynamic display information is acquired by the dynamic display determination information acquisition means based on the satisfaction of the starting condition. A pre-dynamic display signal generating unit generates a pre-dynamic display signal for notifying the slave control unit of the pre-dynamic display information based on the dynamic display determination information acquired by the dynamic display determination information acquiring unit. To be done. In the slave control means, upon receiving the advance dynamic display signal, the advance dynamic display information indicated by the advance dynamic display signal is stored in the advance information storage means. Dynamic display is started while the final specific display is being displayed. The determination result of the dynamic display mode is determined based on the prior information, or the final dynamic display is determined based on the prior dynamic display information. The number of times of the specific display mode is determined by the specific notice number determination means so that the mode becomes the specific dynamic display mode. As a result, when the specific display mode is displayed, the final dynamic display mode in which the specific display mode is displayed is the jackpot or the specific dynamic display mode, so that the player is provided with an effect different from the normal time. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be expected to execute the final dynamic display mode when the specific display mode is displayed.

  The gaming machine A6 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, wherein the specific display mode is displayed so as to hide the identification information in a region where the identification information is displayed.

  According to any of the gaming machines A6, in addition to the effect that any of the gaming machines A1 to A5 has, a specific display mode is displayed so as to hide the identification information in the area where the identification information is displayed. It becomes difficult for the player to understand that the result of is displayed, and there is an effect that the player can show the continuous lottery game as if it were one lottery game.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the gaming machine A7 has a delay display means for delaying the dynamic display of the identification information after the specific display mode is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the dynamic display of the identification information is delayed by the delay display means after the specific display mode is displayed. The display control with information does not overlap, and the control load can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A6, the display control means dynamically displays the identification information on the display means at a low speed for a certain period of time, and then dynamically displays the identification information at a high speed. Of the continuous lottery games, the gaming machine A8 is displayed for a longer period than the predetermined period of the subsequent lottery games.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display unit at a low speed for a certain period of time, and then dynamically displayed at a high speed by the display control unit. Of the continuous lottery games, since it is displayed longer than the fixed period of the subsequent lottery game, it is possible to show the player as if two consecutive lottery games are one lottery game. is there.

<Feature B group>
Based on the satisfaction of the start condition, a win/loss determination means for performing a win/loss determination of a game, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a win/fail determination result of the win/loss determination means, and the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means. Display control means, storage means in which a plurality of dynamic display modes of the identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means are stored, and one dynamic display is based on the result of the judgment from the storage means. In a gaming machine having a dynamic display mode determining means for determining a mode, a fixed period dynamic display mode in which a display period for displaying a specific display mode related to a game is preset in the plurality of dynamic display modes. When the dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means and the dynamic display is started, it is determined whether a predetermined condition is satisfied during the display period. A specific display control means for displaying the specific display mode on the display means when it is determined that the condition is established, and a switching means for switching the dynamic display mode after the specific display mode is displayed to the alternative dynamic display mode. And a gaming machine B1.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the game win/fail judgment is executed by the win/no judgment means based on the establishment of the start condition. The display unit displays the identification information indicating the result of the judgment by the judgment unit. The identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the display control means. A plurality of dynamic display modes of the identification information dynamically displayed by the display control unit are stored in the storage unit. One of the dynamic display modes is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means from the storage means on the basis of the result of the judgment. The plurality of dynamic display modes include a fixed period dynamic display mode in which a display period for displaying a specific display mode regarding a game is preset. When the dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means and the dynamic display is started, it is determined whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied during the display period, and the display is performed when it is determined that the condition is satisfied. The specific display mode is displayed on the means in front of the identification information by the specific display control means. The dynamic display mode after the specific display mode is displayed is switched to the alternative dynamic display mode by the switching means. As a result, different effects can be displayed to the player depending on whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied during the notice display period. Therefore, when the specific display mode is displayed, the subsequent dynamic display mode is also switched, so that the player can produce a fresh effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  The gaming machine B1 has operating means that can be operated by a player, and the satisfaction of the predetermined condition is satisfied when it is determined that the operating means has been operated. ..

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied when it is determined that the operation means operable by the player is operated, and therefore the predetermined condition is set according to the intention of the player. It is possible to establish, and there is an effect that the player can be actively participated in the game.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the specific display mode informs the player of the number of times of display when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the display period, the gaming machine B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the number of times the specific display mode is displayed when the predetermined condition is satisfied during the display period is notified to the player as the specific display mode. There is an effect that the number of times of the specific display mode can be easily identified by the player and the game can be played easily.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the storage means stores at least a plurality of the fixed period dynamic display modes having different numbers of display periods or different periods. When the limited-time dynamic display mode is determined, the display period is set based on the first display period set in the determined limited-time dynamic display mode, and the predetermined period is set in the display period. A gaming machine B4 having display period setting means for setting a next valid period when the condition of is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effect is achieved. That is, at least a plurality of fixed-term dynamic display modes having different numbers of display periods or different periods are stored in the storage means. When the one fixed period dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means, the display period is set based on the first display period set in the determined fixed period dynamic display mode. When the predetermined condition is satisfied in the display period, the next valid period is set by the display period setting means. Thus, even if the display period is set a plurality of times, the initial display period may be set at the start of the dynamic display, and the control load at the start of the dynamic display can be reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that the concentration of the control load can be suppressed.

<Characteristic C group>
Based on the satisfaction of the start condition, a win/loss determination means for performing a win/loss determination of a game, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a win/fail determination result of the win/loss determination means, and the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means. Display control means, storage means in which a plurality of dynamic display modes of the identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means are stored, and one dynamic display is performed from the storage means based on the judgment result. In a gaming machine having a dynamic display mode determining means for determining a mode, a special dynamic display mode set to be able to display a specific display mode related to a game is provided in the plurality of dynamic display modes. When the special dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means and the dynamic display is started, it is determined whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, and it is determined that the condition is satisfied. Based on the above, specific display control means for displaying the specific display mode on the display means, and switching means for switching the dynamic display mode after the specific display mode is displayed to the alternative dynamic display mode. A gaming machine C1 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine C1, the game win/fail judgment is executed by the win/no judgment means based on the establishment of the start condition. Identification information indicating the result of the judgment of the judgment unit is displayed on the display unit. The identification information is displayed on the display means by the display control means. A plurality of dynamic display modes of the identification information dynamically displayed by the display control unit are stored in the storage unit. One of the dynamic display modes is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means from the storage means on the basis of the result of the judgment. A plurality of dynamic display modes include a special dynamic display mode set to be able to display a specific display mode relating to a game. When the special dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means and the dynamic display is started, it is determined whether a predetermined condition is satisfied, and based on the determination that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific display mode is determined. Is displayed on the display means by the specific display control means. The switching means switches the dynamic display mode after the specific display mode is displayed to the alternative dynamic display mode. Thereby, even if the same special dynamic display mode is determined, the display timing of the specific display varies depending on the timing when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, since the timing of switching to the alternative dynamic display mode is also variable, it is possible to make the player appear as if the dynamic display mode is different each time. Therefore, there is an effect that various game effects can be shown to the player.

  The gaming machine C1 has an operating means that can be operated by a player, and the satisfaction of the predetermined condition is satisfied when it is determined that the operating means has been operated. ..

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, it is determined that the predetermined condition is met when it is determined that the operation means operable by the player has been operated, so the predetermined condition is set according to the player's intention. It is possible to establish, and there is an effect that the player can be actively participated in the game.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the remaining time determination means that determines the remaining dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode, and the remaining time determination means determines that the remaining time is less than or equal to the predetermined time. If it is determined that the gaming machine C3, the gaming machine C3 includes: invalidating means for invalidating the establishment of the predetermined condition.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the remaining dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode is determined by the remaining time determination means. When the remaining time determination means determines that the remaining time is less than or equal to the predetermined time, the invalidation means sets the establishment of the predetermined condition invalid. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the specific display is displayed during the period in which the result of winning/judging determination in the dynamic display mode is confirmed and the player cannot know the result of winning/winning determination.

<Feature D group>
Based on the satisfaction of the start condition, a win/loss determination means for performing a win/loss determination of a game, a display means for displaying identification information indicating a win/fail determination result of the win/loss determination means, and the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means. Display control means, storage means in which a plurality of dynamic display modes of the identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means are stored, and one dynamic display is performed from the storage means based on the judgment result. In a gaming machine having a dynamic display mode determining means for determining a mode, a special dynamic display mode set to be able to display a specific display mode related to a game is provided in the plurality of dynamic display modes. It is included that the operating means operable by the player, the operation determining means for determining that the operating means is operated by the player, and the operation determining means determines that the operating means has been operated. Based on the count value of the counting means and the counting means for counting the number of times based on the count value of the counting means, when the special dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed, the operation determining means determines that the operating means has been operated. And a specific display control means for displaying the specific display mode when the display permission condition determined by the above is satisfied, and the gaming machine D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, based on the satisfaction of the starting condition, the game win/loss determination is executed by the win/loss determination means. Identification information indicating the result of the judgment of the judgment unit is displayed on the display unit. The identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the display control means. A plurality of dynamic display modes of the identification information dynamically displayed by the display control unit are stored in the storage unit. One of the dynamic display modes is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means from the storage means on the basis of the result of the judgment. A plurality of dynamic display modes include a special dynamic display mode that is set so that a specific display mode relating to a game can be displayed a predetermined number of times. The operation determination means determines that the player has operated the operation means operable by the player. The number of times is counted by the counting means based on the fact that the operation determining means determines that the operating means has been operated. When the special dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed, it is determined that the operation means has been operated by the operation determination means, and the specific display mode is the specific display control means when the count value of the counting means is equal to or more than a predetermined value. Is displayed on the display means. As a result, even if the operating means is operated, the specific display mode is not displayed unless the operation is performed a predetermined number of times or more, and the effect can be changed depending on the playing method and frequency of the player. Therefore, even if the dynamic display mode is the same, the player can be made to look like different dynamic display modes, and various effects can be provided to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine D1, the display permission condition is determined based on a count value of the counting means and a set number of times of the specific display mode set in the special dynamic display mode. A gaming machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the display permission condition is determined based on the count value of the counting means and the set number of times of the specific display mode set in the special dynamic display mode, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine D1. There is an effect that the display permission condition of the specific display mode can be changed by the special dynamic display mode.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the display permission condition is set for each display of the specific display mode set in the special dynamic display mode, wherein the display permitting condition is set.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the display permission condition is set every time the specific display mode set to the special dynamic display mode is displayed. There is an effect that the specific display mode can be displayed under different conditions every time the is displayed.

<Feature E group>
Based on the establishment of the start condition, at least a win/loss determination means for determining at least a first win that is advantageous to the player and a second win that is advantageous to the player over the first privilege game, and the win/loss determination means. Display means for displaying identification information indicating the result of judgment, display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means. A plurality of dynamic display mode groups that are stored, and a dynamic display mode determination means that determines one dynamic display mode based on the determination result from the storage means. In a gaming machine in which a lottery game is executed based on a lottery result by a determination means, a specific dynamic display mode having a continuous dynamic display mode corresponding to a plurality of lottery games in the plurality of dynamic display mode groups A group is included, and based on the hit determination means determining the first hit, the dynamic display mode of the lottery game continuously executed after the lottery game is set to the specific dynamic display mode group. It has a transition number setting means for setting the number of lottery games to be determined by, and the continuous dynamic display mode is a display continuous with the dynamic display mode of the lottery game before the continuous dynamic display mode is displayed. A gaming machine E1 characterized by being configured in a manner.

  According to the gaming machine E1, whether or not the first win that is advantageous to the player and the second win that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game is determined based on the establishment of the start condition by the success/failure determination means. To be done. The display unit displays the identification information indicating the result of the judgment by the judgment unit. The display control unit controls the display of the identification information on the display unit. The storage means stores a plurality of dynamic display mode groups having a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means. One of the dynamic display modes is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means from the storage means on the basis of the result of the judgment. Then, the lottery game is executed based on the determination result of the lottery game. The plurality of dynamic display mode groups include a specific dynamic display mode group having a continuous dynamic display mode corresponding to a plurality of lottery games. The number of lottery games that determines the dynamic display mode of the lottery game continuously executed after the lottery game from the specific dynamic display mode group based on the determination of the first hit It is set by the setting means. The continuous dynamic display mode is configured in a continuous display mode with the dynamic display mode of the lottery game before the continuous dynamic display mode is displayed. Thus, by winning the first prize, it is possible to make a plurality of lottery games look like one lottery game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game and prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine E1, a display period for displaying a specific display mode regarding a game is preset in the continuous dynamic display mode, and the continuous dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. When the dynamic display is started, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied during the display period, and if it is determined that the display condition is satisfied, a specific display control means for displaying the specific display mode is provided. A gaming machine E2 characterized by being present.

  The gaming machine E2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1. That is, the display period in which the specific display mode regarding the game is displayed is preset to the continuous dynamic display mode. When the continuous dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means and the dynamic display is started, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied during the display period, and if it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the display means is displayed. The specific display mode is displayed by the specific display control means. Therefore, when the continuous dynamic display mode is displayed, the specific display mode is displayed when the predetermined condition is satisfied, so that an effect different from that in the normal time can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine E1 or the gaming machine E2, the continuous dynamic display mode group includes a first continuous dynamic display mode configured in a dynamic display mode from the start of the dynamic display mode to the dynamic display mode, and A second interlocking dynamic display mode in which the displayed state is continued, and a third continuous dynamic display mode configured in a dynamic display mode from the dynamically displayed state to the dynamic display being stopped and displayed. At least, the first continuous dynamic display mode, the second continuous dynamic display mode, and the third continuous mode are selected from the continuous dynamic display mode group corresponding to the number of times set by the transition setting number setting means. The gaming machine E3, wherein any one of the dynamic display modes is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means.

  The gaming machine E3 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or the gaming machine E2. That is, of the group of continuous dynamic display modes, the first continuous dynamic display mode is configured by the dynamic display mode from the start of the dynamic display mode to the dynamic display. In the second continuous dynamic display mode, the dynamically displayed state is continued. The third continuous dynamic display mode is a dynamic display mode from the dynamically displayed state until the dynamic display is stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the number of times set by the transition setting number setting means, the first continuous dynamic display mode, the second continuous dynamic display mode, and the third continuous dynamic display mode are selected from the continuous dynamic display mode group. One of them is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means. Thereby, it is possible to easily set a display mode that is continuous with the display mode of the previous lottery game. Therefore, the dynamic display mode of the lottery game can be made more visible to the player as if it was the dynamic display mode of one lottery game. Therefore, even when the lottery game of the win/fail judgment result is executed a plurality of times, it can be shown to the player as if the missed lottery game was played once, and the player is disappointed in the game. There is an effect that the number of times can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, based on the second hit and the hit/miss determination means, before the lottery game of the number of times set by the transition number setting means is executed. The gaming machine E4 having a reset means for resetting the number of times set by the shift number setting means.

  The gaming machine E4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3. That is, the number of times set by the number-of-transitions setting means is reset by the reset means based on the second hit and the determination of the win/loss determination means before the lottery game of the number of times set by the number-of-transfers setting means is executed. Will be reset. As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that the continuous dynamic display mode is continuously executed even after the jackpot game is started before the lottery game is played the number of times set by the transition number setting means. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the number of times until the lottery game is a jackpot, and it is possible to show the player a change of a plurality of times as if it was one change of a jackpot.

<Characteristic F>
It has a main control means for executing the control of the game and a sub control means for executing the control of the game based on a control signal from the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the start condition. Based on the acquisition means for acquiring the first information, and the establishment of the lottery condition from the first information acquired by the acquisition means, the first win and the first bonus game that is advantageous to the player are given. A win/loss determination means for determining at least a win/win of a second bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game, and a win/loss determination result of the win/loss determination means for the sub-control means. Until the lottery condition is satisfied, the win/loss determination information generating unit that generates win/loss determination information for identifiable notification, and the determination information storage unit that stores the first information, and before the lottery condition is satisfied, The different information configured by the advance information generating means for generating the advance information based on the first information and notifying the slave control means and the dynamic display information for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means. Dynamic display information storage means that stores a plurality of dynamic display information groups, and one of the plurality of dynamic display information groups from the dynamic display information storage means based on the satisfaction of the lottery conditions. Dynamic display information determining means for determining a display information group, and determining one of the dynamic display information from the determined dynamic display information group according to the hit determination result and the first information, and its dynamics. Dynamic display notification information generating means for generating dynamic display notification information for notifying the slave control means of the dynamic display information determined by the static display information determining means, the slave control Means, based on the hit determination information output from the main control means, display means for displaying identification information indicating the hit determination result, display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, On the basis of the dynamic display mode storage unit storing the dynamic display mode of the identification information corresponding to the dynamic display information of the main control unit, and the dynamic display notification information output from the main control unit, Based on the dynamic display mode selection means for selecting the dynamic display mode of the identification information from the dynamic display mode storage means and the prior information received from the main control means, the prior information is set every time the start condition is satisfied. In a gaming machine that has a pre-information storage unit that stores, and in which a lottery game is executed based on the establishment of the lottery condition, the plurality of dynamic display information groups are stored in the first and second determination units by the win/loss determination unit. The above dynamic when triggered by winning The specific dynamic display information group constituted by the specific dynamic display information determined by the display information determining means is included, and the dynamic display mode storage means of the slave control means includes the specific dynamic display information. Corresponding to the display information, a specific dynamic display mode capable of displaying a specific display mode on the display means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition is stored, and the main control means is configured to perform the determination by the win/fail judgment means. The number of transitions for setting the number of lottery games, which determines the dynamic display mode of the lottery games to be continuously executed after the lottery game based on the determination of the first winning, from the specific dynamic display information group. Setting means, and the sub-control means sets the number of times set by the transition number setting means of the main control means based on the determination of the first hit by the hit determination means of the main control means. The number of transitions determination means for determining, and each of the above-mentioned specific dynamic display information groups determined according to the prior information stored in the prior information storage means corresponding to the number of times determined by the number of transitions determination means Preliminary identification for discriminating the specific dynamic display information before the lottery condition is satisfied, and discriminating the specific dynamic display mode selected by the dynamic display mode selecting means in accordance with the determined specific dynamic display information. Of the number of times determined by the dynamic display mode determination means and the transition number determination means, the remaining time for determining the remaining time until the dynamic display of the specific dynamic display mode selected in the final lottery game is completed Specific display number determination for determining the upper limit number of times of displaying the specific display mode through all the specific dynamic display modes selected corresponding to the number of times of the lottery game determined by the time determination means and the transition frequency determination means Means, an alternative dynamic display mode storing means for storing an alternative dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the identification information in place of the specific dynamic display mode, and an upper limit number of times determined by the specific display number determining means. Alternative dynamic display mode selecting means for selecting the alternative dynamic display mode based on the remaining time determined by the remaining time determining means being equal to or more than a predetermined time when the specific display mode is displayed up to And a gaming machine F1.

  According to the gaming machine F1, in the main control means for controlling the game, the first information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the start condition. Based on the establishment of the lottery condition based on the first information acquired by the acquisition means, the first winning game that is advantageous to the player is given the first win and the second winning game that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game. The second win to which the bonus game is awarded is at least judged by the judgment means. On the basis of the control signal from the main control means, the result of the determination of the hit determination means is hit determination information for notifying the sub-control means that the game control is executed by the hit determination information generation means. Is generated. The first information is stored in the determination information storage means until the lottery conditions are satisfied. Before the lottery conditions are established, the preliminary information based on the first information is generated by the preliminary information generating means and is notified to the slave control means. The dynamic display information storage unit stores a plurality of different dynamic display information groups configured by the dynamic display information for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display unit. Based on the satisfaction of the lottery conditions, one dynamic display information group is determined from the plurality of dynamic display information groups from the dynamic display information storage means, and the determined dynamic display information group is judged to be right or wrong. One of the dynamic display information is determined by the dynamic display information determining means according to the determination result and the first information. The dynamic display notification information generating means generates dynamic display notification information for notifying the slave control means of the dynamic display information determined by the dynamic display information determining means. On the other hand, in the slave control means, based on the hit/miss determination information output from the main control means, the display means displays the identification information indicating the hit/miss determination result. The display information is controlled by the display control means on the display means. The dynamic display mode of the identification information corresponding to the dynamic display information of the main control means is stored by the dynamic display mode storage means. Based on the dynamic display notification information output from the main control means, the dynamic display manner of the identification information is selected by the dynamic display manner selecting means from the dynamic display manner storing means. Based on the advance information received from the main control means, the advance information is stored in the advance information storage means every time the start condition is satisfied. The specific dynamic display information group constituted by the specific dynamic display information determined by the dynamic display information determining means upon the determination that the winning/winning determination means has won the first winning is a plurality of dynamic display information. Included in the group. Corresponding to the specific dynamic display information, a specific dynamic display mode capable of displaying the specific display mode on the display means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition is stored by the dynamic display mode storage means of the slave control means. In the main control means, a lottery for determining the dynamic display mode of the lottery game continuously executed after the lottery game from the specific dynamic display information group based on the first hit determination being made by the win/loss determination means. The number of games is set by the transfer number setting means. In the slave control means, the number of times set by the shift number setting means of the main control means is discriminated by the shift number discriminating means based on the judgment of the first hit by the hit determination means of the main control means. Before the lottery conditions are established, each specific dynamic display information determined from the specific dynamic display information group is determined according to the prior information stored in the prior information storage means corresponding to the number of times determined by the transition number determination means. Then, the specific dynamic display mode selected by the dynamic display mode selection means according to the determined specific dynamic display information is determined by the pre-specified dynamic display mode determination means. Of the number of times determined by the transition number determination means, the remaining time until the dynamic display of the specific dynamic display mode selected in the final lottery game is completed is determined by the remaining time determination means. The upper limit number of times that the specific display mode is displayed through all the specific dynamic display modes selected corresponding to the number of lottery games determined by the transition number determination means is determined by the specific display number determination means. The alternative dynamic display mode storing means stores the alternative dynamic display mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed instead of the specific dynamic display mode. When the specific display mode is displayed up to the upper limit number of times determined by the specific display number determination means, the alternative dynamic display mode is replaced based on the remaining time determined by the remaining time determination means being a predetermined time or more. It is selected by the dynamic display mode selection means. As a result, the dynamic display mode after the specific display mode is displayed up to the maximum number of times can be changed to a display mode that matches the remaining time. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a different dynamic display mode depending on the timing of the specific display up to the upper limit number of times, and it is possible to diversify the dynamic display mode given to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine F1, the number-of-movements setting means is configured to be able to set the number of times of transitions equal to or more than the number of the first information stored in the determination information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, the number of times of transfer that is equal to or larger than the number of the first information stored in the determination information storage means can be set by the number-of-transfers setting means, so that more This has the effect of allowing the player to play the lottery game in a specific dynamic display mode and preventing the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In the gaming machine F1 or the gaming machine F2, the alternative dynamic display mode storage means stores a plurality of alternative dynamic display modes with different dynamic display times, and the alternative dynamic display mode selection means operates the plurality of the alternative dynamic display modes. A gaming machine F3, characterized in that, from among the alternative dynamic display modes, the alternative dynamic display mode configured with a dynamic display time closest to the remaining time is selected.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or the gaming machine F2, the following effects are produced. That is, a plurality of alternative dynamic display modes having different dynamic display times are stored by the alternative dynamic display mode storage means. Of the plurality of alternative dynamic display modes, the alternative dynamic display mode configured by the dynamic display time closest to the remaining time is selected by the alternative dynamic display mode selection means. Therefore, since the dynamic display mode is displayed in accordance with the remaining time, the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the identification information is composed of a plurality of identification symbols, and in the alternative dynamic display mode, the remaining one identification symbol among the identification information indicating the second hit. A gaming machine F4, which includes a device for displaying a reach display mode in which only the dynamic display is provided.

  According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect achieved by any one of the game machines F1 to F3, the following effect is achieved. That is, the identification information is made up of a plurality of identification patterns. Among the identification information indicating the second hit, the alternative dynamic display mode includes the one that displays the reach display mode in which only the remaining one identification pattern is dynamically displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can expect a second win by displaying the alternative dynamic display mode.

  In the gaming machine F4, the alternative dynamic display mode is one in which the dynamic display of the identification information is started from the state of the reach display mode.

<Characteristic G>
Start of the lottery game based on the variable state winning device in which the game medium can be won and the second state in which the game medium is more difficult to win than the first state, and the game medium being won. A start winning device that satisfies the condition, and based on the satisfaction of the starting condition, the variable winning device is changed to the first state, and a first bonus game that is advantageous to the player is given and the first win. A win/loss determination means for determining at least a win/win with a second bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the first win, and a display means for displaying identification information indicating a win/no decision result of the win/loss determination means. And a variable process for changing the variable winning a prize device from the second state to the first state based on the display of the identification information indicating the first win or the second win. Before the variable winning device is changed from the second state to the first state after the variable processing is executed by the variable control executing means for executing the variable control and the variable control executing means in the case of the first hit. By the way, a game machine G1 characterized by having a restriction means for restricting the variable winning device from changing to the first state.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the variable winning device allows the game medium to be changed between the first state in which the game medium can be won and the second state in which the game medium is more difficult to win than the first state. The starting condition of the lottery game is established based on the fact that the game medium wins the variable winning device. Based on the establishment of the start condition, the variable winning device is changed to the first state to provide the first privilege game which is advantageous to the player. The first win and the second win which is more advantageous to the player than the first win. The second win to which the bonus game is awarded is at least judged by the judgment means. The display unit displays the identification information indicating the result of the judgment by the judgment unit. The variable control execution means executes a variable process for changing the variable winning a prize device from the second state to the first state based on the display of the identification information indicating the first winning or the second winning. In the case of the first winning, after the variable processing is executed by the variable control executing means, the variable winning device is changed to the first state before the variable winning device is changed from the second state to the first state. What to do is regulated by the regulation means. As a result, in the case of the first winning, the variable winning device is restricted from being changed to the first state, so that it is possible to suppress the disadvantage that the first bonus game is more advantageous than the second bonus game. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the expectation of the second privilege game for the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine G1, the variable winning device has a winning opening through which a gaming medium wins, a restricting position that restricts winning of the gaming medium into the winning opening in the second state, and a winning position in the first state. A movable piece that is movable to a guide position that guides the game medium to the winning opening; and a movable means that moves the movable piece after a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable processing was performed by the variable control execution means. A gaming machine G2, characterized in that the regulating means executes a regulating process within the predetermined time.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in the second state, a restriction position for restricting the winning of the game medium to the winning opening of the variable winning device in which the gaming medium wins, and in the first state, guiding the gaming medium to the winning opening. The movable piece of the movable winning device which is movable is provided at the guiding position. Further, the movable piece is moved by the movable means after a predetermined time of operation after the variable processing is executed by the variable control execution means. The regulation means executes the regulation process within a predetermined time. Therefore, in the first hit, it is possible to regulate the movement of the movable piece before the variable winning device is in the first state, so that the first benefit game is more reliably advantageous to the player than the second benefit game. This has the effect of preventing the problem of becoming

  In the gaming machine G1, the variable winning device has a winning opening through which a gaming medium wins, a restricting position that restricts winning of the gaming medium into the winning opening in the second state, and a winning position in the first state. From the movable piece movable to a guide position for guiding the game medium to the winning opening, the movable means for moving the movable piece based on the execution of the variable processing by the variable control execution means, and the regulation means. A restriction member moving means for moving the restriction member to a position for restricting the movement of the movable piece on the basis of the execution of the restriction process of 1.

  The gaming machine G3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1. That is, in the variable winning device, in the second state, a restricting position that restricts winning of the game medium into the winning opening where the game medium wins, and in the first state, a guiding position that guides the game medium to the winning hole. The movable piece is moved to. The movable piece is moved by the movable means based on the execution of the variable processing by the variable control execution means. The restriction member is moved by the restriction member moving means to the position for restricting the movement of the movable piece based on the execution of the restriction processing by the restriction means. Thereby, the movement of the movable piece can be regulated by the regulation member before the variable winning device is brought into the first state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably prevent the problem that the first privilege game is more advantageous to the player than the second privilege game.

  A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball becomes a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through a winning opening), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

  The gaming machine Z2, wherein each gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “provided with variable display means for dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine Z3, wherein each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operating lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Other>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery in association with a game ball winning a start opening and displays a variation effect and a jackpot effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed to improve the interest of the game. ..
In such a pachinko machine, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a continuous notice display is provided over a plurality of fluctuations to notify in advance that a specific effect such as reach change effect will be performed in the change effect ahead. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-279560).
With regard to this type of pachinko machine, there has been a demand for a gaming machine with a further interest in the game.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and provides a gaming machine that improves interest in a game and can prevent a player from getting tired of the game early. The purpose is to
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is, based on the establishment of the start condition, the first win that is advantageous to the player and the second win that is advantageous to the player over the first privilege game. And at least a hit-or-miss determination means, a display means for displaying identification information indicating the hit-or-miss determination result of the hit-and-miss determination means, and a display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means,
A storage unit in which a plurality of dynamic display mode groups having a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the display control unit are stored, and one dynamic A dynamic display mode determining means for determining a display mode, and a lottery game is executed based on a lottery result by the winning/disagreement determining means. In the plurality of dynamic display mode groups, a plurality of lottery games are performed. A specific dynamic display mode group having a corresponding continuous dynamic display mode is included, and based on the hit determination means determining the first hit, it is continuously executed after the lottery game. It has a transition number setting means for setting the number of lottery games that determines the dynamic display mode of the lottery game from the specific dynamic display mode group, and the continuous dynamic display mode is displayed as the continuous dynamic display mode. It is configured in a display mode continuous with the dynamic display mode of the lottery game before.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, wherein a display period for displaying a specific display mode regarding a game is preset in the continuous dynamic display mode, and the dynamic display mode is set. When the continuous dynamic display mode is determined by the mode determination means and the dynamic display is started, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied during the display period, and when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the display means is displayed. It has a specific display control means for displaying the specific display mode.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, based on the establishment of the start condition, at least the first win that is advantageous to the player and the second win that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game are true or false. It is judged by the judging means whether or not it is right or wrong. The display unit displays the identification information indicating the result of the judgment by the judgment unit. The display control unit controls the display of the identification information on the display unit. The storage means stores a plurality of dynamic display mode groups having a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the display control means. One of the dynamic display modes is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means from the storage means on the basis of the result of the judgment. Then, the lottery game is executed based on the determination result of the lottery game.
The plurality of dynamic display mode groups include a specific dynamic display mode group having a continuous dynamic display mode corresponding to a plurality of lottery games. The number of lottery games that determines the dynamic display mode of the lottery game continuously executed after the lottery game from the specific dynamic display mode group based on the determination of the first hit It is set by the setting means. The continuous dynamic display mode is configured in a continuous display mode with the dynamic display mode of the lottery game before the continuous dynamic display mode is displayed.
Thus, by winning the first prize, it is possible to make a plurality of lottery games look like one lottery game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game and prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the following effects can be obtained in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1. That is, the display period in which the specific display mode regarding the game is displayed is preset to the continuous dynamic display mode. When the continuous dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means and the dynamic display is started, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied during the display period, and when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the display means is displayed. The specific display mode is displayed by the specific display control means.
Therefore, when the continuous dynamic display mode is displayed, the specific display mode is displayed when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and thus there is an effect that the player can be provided with an effect different from that in the normal time.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
114 display control device (a part of display control means)
202 ROM (dynamic display mode storage means)
203a Special symbol holding ball storage area (determination information storage means)
223a prize information storage area ( preliminary information storage means )
S306 determination means S308, S310 dynamic display mode determination means S406 acquisition means
S407 Predetermination means S1607 , S1608 Specific determination means S1611 , S1613 Specific display frequency determination means

Claims (2)

Acquisition means for acquiring the first information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition;
Determination information storage means for storing the first information acquired by the acquisition means,
Determination means for determining the first information stored in the determination information storage means,
Pre-determination means capable of executing pre-determination based on the first information stored in the determination information storage means before being determined by the determination means;
Advance information storage means for storing advance information indicating the advance determination result by the advance determination means each time the acquisition condition is satisfied,
Display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means,
Display control means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means,
A dynamic display mode storage means in which a plurality of dynamic display modes are stored as the dynamic display mode of the determination game for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means,
From the dynamic display mode storage means, a dynamic display mode determining means for determining one dynamic display mode based on the determination result,
A specific display number determining means capable of determining the number of times of displaying the specific display mode on the display means based on the advance information stored in the advance information storage means;
A specific discriminating means for discriminating whether or not to display the specific display mode based on the prior information,
The specific display number determination unit, in a state where the pre information corresponding to the pre-determination indicating that it is determined that the determination result of the specific to the a priori information storage means is not stored, the specific determination When it is determined by the means to display the specific display mode, the specific display mode is displayed on the display means less than the number of times the acquisition condition corresponding to the advance information stored in the advance information storage means is satisfied. The dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed at the final number of times is configured to be determined to be a specific dynamic display mode,
In the specific display mode, when the number of times is determined by the specific display number determining means, two consecutive motions displayed corresponding to each of the first information stored in the determination information storage means are displayed. Is displayed once in the display area in which the identification information is displayed over the dynamic display mode,
During the period in which the specific display mode is displayed, the special identification information corresponding to the identification information is displayed in a display mode different from the identification information in a region smaller than the identification information in the area where the specific display mode is not displayed. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to be capable of being played.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the display means is arranged at a position visible to a player.

Images